Skip to main content

Full text of "Ora maritima, a Latin story for beginners, with grammar and exercises"

See other formats


^^  ■itma  ^crtes 


A    MARITIMA 

N  STORY  B}R  BEGINNERS 


EA.  SOnNENSCHEIN.D.  IJrT. 


mts^AVKammmamaxmnryisza^iT^Ai.immmmmHm 


ORA    MARITIMA 


m.      -./•!.  ■.■•>-'--i-  :^.5^'7 


iPresenteJ)  to 

of  tbe 

Tllniverettp  of  ZToronto 


\\o^50:ib(>>L  ^^   tWWrv 


ORA    MARITIMA 


A   LATIN   STORY  FOR  BEGINNERS 


WITH    GRAMMAR   AND    EXERCISES 


.^^:v 


d^^ 


ET A;  S O  N  N  E N S C  H  E I N,  D. Litt.,  Oxon. 

Professok   ov   Latin   and  Gref.k  in  thb 
University  ok  Birmingham 


Natura  non  facit  saltum 


SIXTH 


EDITION 


LONDON 

SVVAN    SONNENSCHEIN    &   CO.,   LIMD. 

NEW   YORK:    THE    MACMILLAN   COMPANY 

1909 


f 


PA 

ZD  o'0 

I9  0C] 


FILIIS   METS   TRIBUS 

D.   D. 

PATER    ET    PRAECEPTOR 


The  previous  cditions  of  this    Book  appeared   in    J/av,    1902; 

November,  1902;  November,  1903  ;  Aiii^usf,  1905; 

and  Jiily,  1906. 


PREFACE 

My  apology  for  adding  another  to  the  formidable  array  of 
elementary  Latin  manuals  is  that  there  is  no  book  in  existence 
which  satisfies  the  requirements  which  I  have  in  mind  as  of  most 
importance  for  the  fruitful  study  of  the  language  by  beginners. 
What  I  desiderate  is  : — 

1.  A  continuous  narrative  froni  beginning  to  end,  capable  of 
appealing  in  respect  of  its  vocabulary  and  subject  matter  to  the 
minds  and  interests  of  young  pupils,  and  free  from  all  those 
syntactical  and  styhstic  difficulties  which  make  even  the  easiest  of 
I/atin  authors  something  of  a  problem. 

2.  A  work  which  shall  hold  the  true  balance  between  too  much 
and  too  Httle  in  the  matter  of  systematic  grammar.  In  my 
opinion,  existing  manuals  are  disfigured  by  a  disproportionate 
amount  oilifekss  Accidence.  The  outcome  of  the  traditional  system 
is  that  the  pupil  learns  a  multitude  of  'La.iin  /orms  (Cases,  Tenses, 
Moods),  but  very  little  Latin.  That  is  to  say,  he  acquires  a 
bowing  acquaintance  with  all  the  forms  of  Nouns  and  Verbs — 
such  as  Ablatives  in  a,  e,  t\  o,  u,  ^rd  Persons  in  af,  et,  it,  and  so 
forth— before  he  gets  a  real  hold  of  the  meaning  or  use  of  any  of 
these  forms.  But,  as  Goethe  said  in  a  different  connexion,  "What 
one  cannot  use  is  a  heavy  burden  "  ;  and  my  experience  leads  me 
to  think  that  a  multitude  of  forms  acts  as  an  encumbrance  to  the 
pupil  at  an  early  stage  by  distracting  his  attention  from  the  more 
vital  matters  of  vocabulary,  sentence  construction,  and  order  of 
words.  The  real  meaning  of  the  Ablative,  for  instance,  can  be 
just  as  well  learned  from  the  ist  Declension  as  from  all  llie 
declensions  taken  together.  And  furiher,  to  run  over  all  the 
declensions  without  proper  understanding  of  their  meanings  and 


vl.  PREFACE 

uses  with  and  without  Prepositions  is  a  real  dan:;er,  as  begetting 
all  sorts  of  misconception  and  error — so  much  so  that  the  muddled 
piipil  too  often  never  learns  the  syntax  of  the  Cases  at  all.  No 
doubt  all  the  Declensions  and  Conjugations  must  be  learned  be- 
fore  a  Latin  author  is  attacked.  But  when  a  few  of  them  have 
bcen  brought  within  the  pupiFs  ken,  he  finds  Hltle  difficulty  in 
mastering  the  others  in  a  rapid  and  more  mechanical  fashion.  In 
the  present  book  I  have  dealt  directly  with  only  three  declensions 
of  Nouns  and  Adjectives  and  the  Indicative  Active  oi  sum  and  of 
the  ist  Conjugation  (incidentally  introducing  some  oftheforms  of 
Pronouns,  and  those  forms  of  the  Passive  which  are  made  up  wilh 
the  Verb-adjectives,  as  in  Enghsh) ;  but  in  connexion  witli  this 
amount  of  Accidence  I  have  treated  very  carefully  the  most 
prominent  uses  of  the  Cases  with  and  without  Prepositions,  and 
the  question  of  the  order  of  words,  which  I  have  reduced  to  a  few 
simple  rules.  It  is  my  hope  that  teachers  who  trust  themselves  to 
my  guidance  in  this  book  will  agree  with  me  in  thinking  that  the 
time  spent  on  such  fundamental  matters  as  these  is  not  thrown 
away.  The  pupil  who  has  mastered  this  book  ought  to  be  able  to 
read  and  write  the  easiest  kind  of  Latin  with  some  degree  of 
fluency  and  without  serious  mistakes  :  in  a  word,  Latin  ought  to 
have  become  in  some  degree  a  living  language  to  him. 

Above  all  it  is  my  hope  that  my  Httle  story  may  be  read  with 
pleasure  by  those  for  whom  it  is  meant.  The  picture  which  it 
gives  of  the  early  Britons  is  intended  to  be  historically  correct,  so 
far  as  it  goes ;  and  the  talk  about  "  anchors  "  and  "boats"  and 
"hoUdays  "  will  perhaps  be  acceptable  as  a  substitute  for  "iustitia," 
"  modestia,"  "  temperantia,"  and  the  other  abstract  ideas  which 
hover  Hke  ghosts  around  the  gate  of  Latin.^  I  have  kept  my 
Vocabulary  strictly  classical,  in  spite  of  the  temptation  to  introduce 


'"The  pupil  ordinarily  approaches  Latin  and  Greek  through  a  cloud  o/ 
abstraclions."—\.  SlDGWlCK. 


PREFACE  vii. 

topics  of  purely  modern  interest,  such  as  bicycles  :  in  the  later 
sections  of  the  book  it  is  Caesarian.  The  number  of  words  in  the 
vocabulary  is  relatively  large ;  but  words  are  necessary  if  anything 
worth  saying  is  to  be  said,  and  a  large  proportion  of  my  words  have 
a  close  resemblance  to  the  EngUsh  words  derived  from  them.  Apart 
from  this,  the  acquisition  of  a  working  vocabulary  is  an  essential 
part  of  any  real  mastery  of  a  language,  and  it  is  a  task  eminently 
within  the  powers  of  the  youthful  mind. 

In  regard  to  the  quasi-inductive  study  of  grammar  I  have 
expressed  myself  in  an  article  contributed  to  Mr.  Sadler's  Special 
Reports^  extracts  from  which  are  given  below.  But  I  wish  it  to  be 
understood  that  there  is  nothing  in  this  book  to  prevent  its  being 
used  by  teachers  who  prefer  the  traditional  method  of  teaching  the 
Grammar  before  the  sections  of  the  story  and  the  Exercises  in 
which  it  is  embodied.  All  the  Grammar  required  is  given  in  the 
"  Preparations "  (e.g.  pp.  65,  66,  67,  69,  etc.)  It  will  be  clear 
from  these  tables  and  from  my  "  Drill  Exercises  "  that  I  by  no 
means  undervalue  the  importance  of  systematic  training  of  the 
memory  in  the  early  stages  of  learning. 

In  the  present  edition  (lyoS)  I  have  marked  t!ie  naturally  long 
vowels  in  the  text,  as  in  the  "  Preparations  "  and  the  alphalietical 
vocabulary.  But  1  have  dehberately  abstained  from  burdening 
the  memory  of  pupils  and  teachers  with  subtleties  of  pronunciation, 
such  as  are  involved  in  the  marking  of  "  liidden  quantitits  "  (except 
in  such  obvious  cases  as  rex,  lux,  ndndum) :  e.g.  rexi  from  rego, 
texi  from  tego,  constat  but  condit,  infert  but  intulit,  Insanus  but 
incultus.  If  a  warning  is  needed  against  encumbering  the  teach- 
ing  of  Latin  with  difficult  questions  of  t])is  kind,  it  will  be  found 
emphatically  expressed  in  the  recommendations  of  many  of  the 
Lehrplane  issued  by  German  educational  authorities. 

Most  of  the  passages  will  be  found  too  long  for  one  lesson, 
unless  with  older  pupils.  They  must  be  spht  up,  according  to 
circumstances. 


viii.  PREFACE 

It  is  possible  that  sorne  teachers  may  prefer  to  use  this  book 
not  as  a  first  book  in  the  strict  sense  of  the  term,  but  rather  after 
say  a  year's  work  at  some  other  book ;  and  I  can  well  imagine 
that  it  might  be  used  to  good  purpose  in  this  way,  for  instance  as 
a  bridge  to  Caesar,  whose  invasions  of  Britain  are  narrated  in  out- 
hne  in  my  Chapters  VIII.- XIV.,  or  for  practice  in  rapid  reading 
side  by  side  with  an  author. 

My  best  thanks  are  due  to  Lord  Avebury  for  permission  to 
reproduce  the  photographs  of  Roman  and  British  coins  which 
appear  in  this  volume,  especially  of  the  coin  of  Antoninus  Pius 
with  the  figure  of  Britannia  upon  it — the  prototype  of  our  modern 
penny. 

E.  A.  S. 

BlRMlNGHAM, 

November,  igo8. 


The  following  passages  have  struck  me  since  my  Preface  was 
written  as  throwing  hght  on  the  idea  of  this  book. 

"  The  real  question  is  not  whether  we  shall  go  on  teaching  Latin, 
but  what  we  can  do  to  teach  it  so  as  to  make  learners  understand  that 
it  is  not  a  dead  language  at  allP — Sir  F.  POLLOCK,  in  the  '  Pilot,' 
Jan.  I2th,  1901. 

"  We  tnust  convince  our  pupils  of  the  reality  of  the  study  [Latin] 
by  introducing  them  at  as  early  a  period  as  possible  to  a  real  book." — 
P.  A.  Barnett  in  "  Common  Sense  in  Education  and  Teaching," 
p.  210. 

"  Assimilate  the  sysiem  of  teaching  the  classical  languages  to  that 
which  I  have  shadowed  forth  for  modern  language  teachingP — 
Professor  Mahaffy,  Address  to  Modern  Language  Association, 
Dec,  1901. 


CONTENTS 


Newer  Metiiods  in  the  Teaching  of  Latin 


Pagb 

1 1 


TEXT. 

I. OrA    MARiriMA 


II. — Patruus  meus 
III. — Monumenta  antiqua 
IV. — Delectamenta  puerorum 

V. — Magister  noster     - 

VI. — Britannia  antiqua  - 


VII. — Vestigia  Romanorum  - 


ist  Declension,  with  the 
Present  Indicative  of 
sum  and  of  the  ist 
Conjugation      -         -     23 

2nd  Declension  in  -us   -     26 

2nd  Declension  in  um  -     28 

2nd  Declension;  words 
VOnQ  puer  -         -         -     30 

2nd  Declension  ;  words 
Hke  magister     -         -32 

Mixed  forms  of  ist  and 
2nd  Declension,  with 
Past  Imperfect  Indic- 
ative  of  sum  and  of 
the  ist  Conjugation 
(Active  Voice)  -         -     33 

-  The  other  Tenses  of 
the  Indicative  of 
sum  and  of  the 
ist  Conjugation 
(Active  Voice)       -     38 


CONTENTS 


viii. expeditio  prima  c.   lulii 

Caesaris   - 

IX. — Pax  violata 

X. — Certamina  varia 

XI. — Naves    Romanae 

XII. — Gentium    Britannicarum 
Societas    - 

XIII.— Maria  Britannica 

XIV.  —  Britannia  pacata 

XVI. ROBUR  et  aes  triplex 


.^rd  Declcnsion- 


Recapitulation  of  3; 
Declension    - 

Adjectives    of    ^rd 
Declension    - 


PREPARATIONS  AND  GRAMMAR      - 
DRILL  EXERCISES  ON  THE  TEXT 

Latin  Drill,  Conversations,  etc,  with  English 
sentences  for  rc-translation         .         .         .         _ 

APPENDICES 

I.   How  to  translate  the  Latin  Gerundive  and  Gerund 
II.  How  to  translate  the  principal  Enghsh  Prepositions 

LA  1 IN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARV 


43 
45 
46 
48 

49 
51 


55 
59 


138 

MS 


NEWER    METHODS    IN   THE 
TEACHING  OF   LATIN 


We  are  familiar  with  the  watchwords  of  two  opposed  camps  on 
the  sabject  of  language-teaching.  The  old-fashioned  view  that 
the  "  declining  of  nouns  and  verbs,"  to  use  Dr.  Johnson's  phrase, 
is  a  necessary  prehminary  to  the  reading  of  any  text  is  nowadays 
met  with  the  continental  cry  of  "  Fort  mit  der  Grammatik  ! " 
But  we  are  not  really  compelled  to  accept  either  of  these  harsh 
alternatives,  as  the  more  moderate  adherents  of  the  new  German 
school  are  now  fain  to  admit.  Grammar  has  its  proper  place 
in  any  systematised  method  of  teaching  a  language ;  but  that 
place  is  not  at  the  beginning  but  rather  at  the  end  of  each  of  the 
steps  into  which  a  well-graduated  course  must  be  divided. 
Speaking  of  the  course  as  a  whole,  we  may  say  that  the  learning 
of  grammar  should  proceed  side  by  side  with  the  reading  of  a 
text.  The  old  view,  which  is  far  from  extinct  at  the  present  day, 
though  it  is  rarely  carried  out  in  all  its  rigour,  was  that  the  pupil 
must  learn  the  rules  of  the  game  before  he  attempts  to  play  it. 
The  modern  view  is  that  just  as  in  whist  or  hockey  one  learns 
the  rules  by  playing  the  game,  so  in  the  study  of  a  language  one 
learns  the  grammar  best  by  the  reading  of  a  simple  text.     But 

*  Extracted  fmm  an  article  contributed  to  Mr.  Sadler^s  Special  Reporti. 


12      NEWER   METHODS   IN    THE   TEACHING   OF   LATIN 

it  is  necessary  at  once  to  draw  a  distinction,  which  marks  the 
difference  between  the  earlier  and  the  more  developed  form  of 
the  new  method.  The  mistake  made  by  the  first  zealots  of  the 
new  school  was  that  they  plunged  the  pupil  without  pre- 
paration  into  the  reading  of  what  were  called  "  easy  passages," — 
passages  taken  from  any  ordinary  book,  and  easy  perhaps  as 
compared  with  other  passages  which  might  have  been  selected, 
but  still  bristUng  with  a  multitude  of  heterogeneous  forms 
and  constructions.  This  was  an  "inductive  method "  with  a 
vengeance  ;  but  it  soon  became  evident  that  to  expect  a  young 
beginner  to  work  his  way  through  such  a  jungle  to  the  light  of 
clear  grammatical  consciousness  was  to  expect  too  much ;  *  and 
even  for  the  adult  beginner  the  process  is  slow  and  laborious. 
For  what  is  the  object  of  grammar  unless  to  make  the  facts  of  a 
language  accessible  and  inteUigible  by  presenting  them  in  a 
simple  arrangement  ?  Here  as  elsewhere  science  ought  surely  to 
step  in  as  an  aid,  not  an  obstacle,  to  understanding.  What 
the  advocates  of  the  new  school  failed  to  see  was  that 
"  nature "  cannot  dispense  with  "art";  in  other  words  that  the 
text  which  is  to  serve  as  the  basis  of  an  inductive  study  of  the 
language  must  be  specially  constructed  so  as  to  exhibit  those 
features  on  which  the  teacher  desires  to  lay  stress  at  a  particular 
stage  of  learning. 

What  is  the  ordinary  Enghsh  practice  at  the  present  day? 
On  this  point  others  are  more  competent  to  speak  than  I  ;  but 
I  imagine  I  am  not  far  wrong  in  saying  that  the  first  step  in 
learning  Latin  is  to  spend  a  month  or  two  in  learning  declensions 
and  conjugations  by  rote— not,  let  us  hope,  complete  with 
their  irregularities  and  exceptions,   but  in  outline.      The  pupil 


•  A  distinguished  representative  of  the  Neuere  Richtung  admitted  in 
conversation  with  the  present  writer  some  years  ago  that  the  teaching  of 
French  out  of  his  own  book  was  "  Ilundesarbeit "  (Aorj^-work.) 


NEWER   METHODS    IN    TIIE   TEACIIING   OF   LATIN      I3 

then  proceeds  to  the  reading  and  wrlting  of  easy  sentences, 
perhaps  in  such  a  book  as  "  Gradatim " ;  and  after  say  a 
year  or  more  he  will  be  reading  easy  selections  from  a  Latin 
author.  AU  the  while  he  recapitulates  his  gramuiar  and  ex- 
tends  his  grammatical  horizon.  This  is,  in  any  case,  an 
immense  improvement  on  the  older  plan  of  learning  the  whole 
of  the  old  Eton  Latin  Grammar  in  its  Latin  dress  without 
understanding  a  word  of  what  is  meant  by  its  "  as  in  praesenti " 
and  other  mysteries.  If  wisely  administered,  this  method  may 
also  avoid  the  error  of  "  Henry's  First  Latin  Book,"  which 
taught  an  intolerable  deal  of  Accidence  and  Syntax  to  a  half- 
pennyworth  of  text ;  though,  on  the  other  hand,  Henry's  First 
Latin  Book  was  an  attempt  to  accompany  the  learning  of 
grammar  with  the  reading  of  easy  sentences  from  the  very 
beginning,  and  in  so  far  was  better  than  the  method  we  are  con- 
sidering.  For  I  must  maintain,  with  all  deference  to  the  opinion 
of  others  whose  experience  is  wider  than  my  own,  that  we  are  as 
yet  far  frotn  having  drawn  the  full  conclusions  of  the  process  of 
reasoning  on  which  we  have  entered.  There  should  be  no  pre- 
liminary  study  of  grammar  apart  from  the  reading  of  a  text.  The 
declensions  and  conjugations,  learncd  by  rote  apart  from  their  apph- 
cations,  cannot  be  properly  assimilated  or  understood,  and  often 
prove  a  source  of  error  rather  than  enh'ghtenment  in  subsequent 
study.  They  have  to  be  learned  over  and  over  again — always  in 
doses  which  are  too  large  for  digestion,  and  the  pupil  has  mean- 
while  been  encouraged  to  form  a  bad  habit  of  mind.  Half  know- 
ledge  in  this  case  toooften  leads  to  the  unedifying  spectacle  of  the 
Sixth  Form  boy  or  the  University  undergraduate  who  is  still  so 
shaky  in  his  accidence  that  he  cannot  pass  his  "  Smalls  "  without  a 
special  effort,  though  in  some  respects  he  may  be  a  good  scholar. 
But  still  more  serious  is  the  effect  of  ihe  false  conceptions  which  are 
inevitably  implanted  in  the  mind  by  this  method  of  grammar  with- 
out  understanding.     The  pupil  learns  fneftsd,  "  by  or  with  a  table," 


I.}      NEWER   METIIODS   IN    TIIE   TEACTIING   OF   LATIN 

agricold^  "  by  or  with  a  farmer  " — both  of  them  impossible  Laiin  for 
the  English  in  its  natural  sense;  viensae  meaning  strictly  "to  a  table" 
is  almost  impossible  in  any  elementary  context.  Yct  the  pupil 
necessarily  supposes  that  in  some  context  or  other  they  must  have 
those  meanings ;  it  is  often  years  before  he  discovers  that  he  has 
been  the  victim  of  a  practical  joke.  Some  boys  never  see  the  fun 
to  the  bitter  end ;  in  other  words,  they  never  learn  the  syntax  of 
the  Cases  at  all.  And  where  are  the  counterbalancing  advantages 
of  this  method  ?  The  pupil  is  introduced  at  an  early  stage  to  the 
reading  of  selections  from  Latin  authors.  But  what  if  the  interest 
and  stimulus  of  reading  consecutive  passages  could  be  secured 
without  the  sacrifice  of  clearness  and  grasp  which  is  involved  in 
the  method  of  preliminary  grammar?  The  advantages  would 
seem  in  that  case  to  be  all  on  one  side.  Each  new  grammatical 
feature  of  the  language  would  be  presented  as  it  is  wanled,  in  an 
interesting  context,  and  would  be  firmly  grasped  by  the  mind ;  at 
convenient  points  the  knowledge  acquired  would  be  summed  up 
in  a  table  (the  declension  of  a  noun  or  the  forms  of  a  tense). 
The  foundations  of  granimar  would  thus  be  securely  laid ; 
there  would  be  no  traps  for  ihe  understanding,  because  each  new 
feature  would  be  presented  in  concrete  form,  that  is  in  a  context 
which  explained  it.  For  example,  instead  o[t?iensd,  "  by  or  with  a 
table,"  etc,  we  should  have  in  niensd,  "  on  a  table,"  cum  agrico/d, 
"with  a  farmer,"  a/>  agricold,  "  by  a  farmer"  ;  ad  mensatn,  "to  a 
table  "  or  sometimes  "  by  {i.e.  near)  a  table ;  "  agricolae  daf,  but 
not  metisae  dat.  After  one  declension  had  been  caught  in  this 
way,  the  others  would  not  need  so  elaborate  a  treatment.  But  still 
the  old  rulc  of  "  festina  lente  "  would  warn  the  teacher  not  to  im- 
pose  too  great  a  burden  on  the  young  or  even  the  adult  beginner ; 
ir  i3  no  light  task  to  learn  simultaneously  forms  and  their 
nieanings,  vocabulary,  ond  the  fundamental  facts  of  syntax.  It 
must  be  admitted  that  the  melhod  which  I  am  advocating  is  a  slow 
one  at  first ;  but  it  is  sure,  and  binds  fast.      The  method  of  pre- 


NEWER   METHODS   IN    THE   TEACHING   OF   LATIN      15 

liminary  grammar  might  be  called  the  railroad  method.  The 
traveller  by  rail  travels  fast,  but  he  sees  httle  of  the  country 
through  which  he  is  whirled.  The  longest  way  round  is  often  the 
shortest  way  home;  and  my  experience  has  been  that  the  time 
spent  at  the  start  without  proceeding  beyond  the  very  elenients  of 
grammar  is  time  well  spent.  A  fair  vocabulary  is  acquired — 
wiihout  effort — in  the  course  of  reading  ;  for  the  learning  of  new 
wc.rds,  especially  if  they  are  chosen  so  as  to  present  obvious 
similarities  to  English  words,  is  a  task  eminently  within  the 
powers  of  the  youthful  mind ;  and  all  words  met  with  in  an 
interesting  context  arouse  attention  and  impress  themselves  on  the 
mind  of  their  own  accord.  AU  the  while  the  pupil  is  forming  his 
feeUng  for  the  language  and  gradually  becoming  habituated 
to  ordinary  ways  of  saying  ordinary  things.  He  gradually  loses 
that  sense  of  strangeness  which  is  the  great  barrier  to  anything  hke 
mastery.*  It  is  surprising  how  much  can  be  said  in  Latin  without 
using  more  than  a  single  declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives  and 
a  single  conjugation  of  verbs.f  The  habit  of  reading  very  easy 
Latin,  thus  acquired  at  an  early  stage,  will  prove  of  the  utmost 
value  when  the  pupil  approaches  the  study  of  a  Latin  author. 
Such  a  book  as  I  have  in  mind  should  therefore  do  something  to 
bridge  over  the  formidable  chasm  which  at  present  separates  the 
reading  of  isolated  sentenccs  from  the  reading  of  an  author. 

AU  Latin  authors  as  they  stand,  are  far  too  difficult  to 
serve  as  a  basis  of  study  for  beginners  :  and  they  are  also,  I 
may  add,   not   well   adapted  in  respect  of  subject    matter  and 


*One  great  advantage  of  this  method,  especially  for  learners  who  are 
able  to  cover  the  ground  at  a  fair  rate  of  progress,  is  that  it  lends  itself  to 
acquiring  the  "art  of  reading  Latin"  (as  distinct  from  the  art  of  consiruing  il), 
to  use  Prof.  W.  G.  Hale's  phrase — the  art  of  rapid  reading. 

X  There  are  some  i,cxx>  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  in  Latin  (including 
Compounds), 


l6     NEWER   METHODS   IN    THE   TEACHING   OF   LATIN 

sentiment  to  appeal  to  the  mind  of  the  very  young.  Caesar  may 
no  doubt  be  made  interesting  to  a  boy  or  girl  of  twelve  by  a  skilful 
teacher  with  the  aid  of  maps  aiid  pictiires.  But,  after  all,  the  Gallic 
War  can  never  be  what  it  was  never  meant  to  be,  a  child's  book. 
The  ideal  "  Reader,"  which  should  be  the  centre  of  instruction 
during  the  early  stages  of  a  young  pupiVs  course,  should  be  really 
interesting ;  simple  and  straightforward  in  regard  to  its  subject 
matter,  modern  in  setting,  and  as  classical  as  may  be  in  form — a 
book  which  the  pupil  may  regard  with  benevolent  feehngs,  not 
with  mere  "gloomy  respect,"*  as  worth  knowing  for  its  own  sake. 
It  should  be  well  illustratcd  with  pictures,  diagrams,  and  maps, 
provided  always  that  the  illustrations  are  to  the  point,  and  such  as 
are  really  feU  to  be  needed  to  explain  the  text  and  make  it  Hve. 
"  Modern  in  setting,"  for  otherwise  the  book  will  not  appeal  to  the 
young  mind;  yet  there  is  much  justification  for  the  demand  made 
by  many  adherents  of  the  newer  school  that  the  subject  matter 
of  any  school  book  deahng  with  a  foreign  language  should  be 
closely  associated  with  the  history  and  the  manners  and  customs 
of  the  people  who  spoke  or  speak  the  language.  Possibly  the  two 
demands  are  not  irreconcilable ;  the  subject  matter  may  be 
historical  and  national,  but  the  point  of  view  from  which  it  is 
regarded  may  be  modern.  For  EngUsh  pupils  learning  Latin  the 
reconcihation  ought  to  present  Httle  difhcuUy  ;  but  nearly  every 
great  nation  of  Europe  has  its  points  of  contact  wiih  Rome,  and 
therefore  its  opportunities  of  constructing  Latin  Readers  which  are 
national  in  more  senses  than  one.  On  the  modern  side  they  may 
be  patriotic  in  tone,  and  inspired  by  that  love  of  nature  wliich 
appeals  so  dircctly  to  the  youthful  mind  ;  on  the  ancient  side  they 
may  be  historical  and  instructive  in  the  narrower  sense  of  the 
term.  And  the  illuslrations  should  also  have  this  two-fold 
character  ;  they  should  include  subjects  both  ancient  and  modem, 

•  Lord  Rosebery  in  his  Rectorial  Address  at  Glasgow,  1900. 


NEWER   METHODS   IN    THE   TEACHING   OF   LATIN      17 

it  being  always  remembered  in  regard  to  the  former  that  their 
object  is  not  to  make  the  boy  or  girl  an  archaeologist,  but  simply 
to  act  as  an  aid  to  the  imagination  and  enable  it  to  reaUse  what 
ancient  civilisation  was  like.  A  good  modern  fancy  sketch  may 
often  be  more  instructive  from  this  point  of  view  than  a  cut  taken 
from  a  dictionary  of  antiquities. 

The  method  which  I  advocate  is,  therefore,  on  its  linguistic 
side,  analogous  in  some  respects  to  the  so-called  "natural  method  " 
or  to  the  method  by  which  an  adult,  left  to  his  own  resources, 
usually  attempts  to  master  a  foreign  tongue.  He  begins  by 
attacking  some  easy  book  or  newspaper,  with  the  help  of  a 
dictionary,  and  he  picks  up  the  grammar  as  he  goes  along.  The 
method  is  in  both  cases  hetiretic,  in  so  far  as  the  learner  does 
not  try  to  reconstruct  the  language  out  of  the  grammar,  as 
a  palaeontologist  reconstructs  an  extinct  animal  from  a  study  of  a 
few  bones.  But  in  the  one  case  the  learner  works  on  a  text  which 
presents  all  the  variety  and  complexity  of  nature;  in  the  other,  on 
a  text  which  has  been  simplified  and  systematised  by  art,  so  as  to 
lead  directly  to  a  clear  view  of  certain  fundamental  grammatical 
facts.  Gianted  the  premises,  I  conceive  that  there  will  be  no  great 
difficulty  in  accepting  the  conclusion ;  for  there  can  hardly  be  a 
better  method  of  teaching  a  language  than  that  which  combines  the 
systematic  order  of  the  grammar  with  the  interest  and  life  of  the 
story-book.  The  crux  of  the  situation  is  to  write  such  a  school  book; 
and  though  it  may  be  long  before  an  ideal  book  of  the  kind  is  pro- 
duced,  the  problem  ought  not  to  be  impossible  of  solution,  if  once 
the  necessity  ofa  solution  from  the  teachingpoint  of  viewisreahsed. 
On  the  one  hand  the  ideal  book  ought  to  have  a  sustained  interest, 
and  if  possible  to  form  a  continuous  narrative  from  beginning  to 
end ;  otherwise  much  of  the  effect  is  lost ;  this  adds  materially  to 
the  difficulty  of  writing.  On  the  other  hand  there  are  various 
considerations  which  lighten  the  task.  The  writer  has  before  him 
an  infinite  variety  of  choice  in  regard  to  his  subject  matterj  and 


l8     NEWER   METIIODS   IN    TIIE   TEACIIING   OF   LATIN 

though  his  grammatical  order  must  be  systematic,  he  is  under  no 
obligation  to  confine  himself  absolutely  to  the  narrowest  possible 
grammatical  field  at  each  step.  For  example  adjectives*  may  be, 
as  they  should  be  on  other  grounds,  treated  side  by  side  with  the 
substantives  which  they  resemble  in  form,  and  the  easy  forms  of 
possum  ie.g-t  poi-es,  pot-esi,  pot-erani)  side  by  side  with  the 
corresponding  forms  of  sum.  Here  we  have  material  for  the 
building  of  sentences.  We  may  even  go  further  and  admit  a 
certain  number  of  forms  which  anticipate  future  grammatical 
lessons,  provided  they  are  not  too  numerous  or  of  such  a  character 
as  to  confuse  the  grammatical  impression  which  it  is  the  purpose 
in  hand  to  produce.  For  example,  forms  hke  inquam,  inquit 
might  be  introduced,  if  necessary,  long  before  the  learning  of  the 
defective  verbs  was  reached ;  they  would,  of  course,  be  accom- 
panied  by  their  translations  and  treated  as  isolated  words  without 
any  grammatical  explanation.  Tact  in  introducing  only  such  forms 
as  are  not  liable  to  lead  to  false  inferences  is  necessary ;  and,  of 
course,  the  fewer  such  anticipations  there  are  the  better.  A 
certain  latitude  must  also  be  conceded  in  regard  to  idiom  and 
style.  While  it  is  of  importance  that  the  pupil  should  come  across 
nothing  which  might  react  disadvantageously  on  his  future  com- 
position,  it  is  mere  pedantry  to  insist  on  any  exalted  standard  of 
literary  excellence.  The  writer  who  works  under  the  hmitation 
imposed  by  the  conditions  of  the  problem  should  not  attempt  any 
high  style  of  diction ;  it  is  sufificient  if  his  Latin  is  up  to  the 
standard  of  such  isolated  sentences  as  usually  form  the  mental 
pabulum  of  the  beginner,  though  it  might  well  be  somewhat 
higher. 

I  would  here  anticipate  a  possible  objection.  Would  not  such 
si  book  be  too  easy  ?  Would  it  provide  a  suflficient  amount  of 
mental  gymnastic  to  serve  as  a  means  of  training  the  faculties  of 

*Including  Possessive  Adjectives  and  Parliciples  (Verb-adjectives). 


NEWER   METHODS   IN    THE   TEACHING   OF   LATIN      19 

reason  and  judgment  ?  That  would  depend  altogether  on  the  aiin 
which  the  writer  set  before  himself.  There  is  plenty  of  room 
within  the  limits  of  the  first  declension  and  the  first  conjugation 
for  the  training  of  the  mind  in  habits  of  accurate  thought  and 
expression ;  for  instance,  the  sentences  may  be  made  as  difficult  in 
regard  to  order  of  words  as  you  please.  But  I  would  urge  that 
they  can  hardly  be  made  too  easy  at  the  beginniiig.  It  is  some- 
times  forgotten  that  mental  training  is  not  synonymous  with  the 
inculcation  of  a  mass  of  grammatical  forms  which  only  burden  the 
memory,  and  that  the  habit  of  reading  with  care  and  fluency  is  it- 
self  a  mental  discipline  of  the  highest  value.  What  the  teacher  of 
any  language  has  to  do  is  not  to  accustom  his  pupil  to  regard  each 
sentence  as  a  nut  to  crack  or  a  pitfall  to  beware  of ;  but  rather  to 
induce  him  by  the  art  of  "gentle  persuasion  "  to  look  upon  the 
foreign  tongue  as  a  friend  to  be  approached  on  terms  of  easy 
familiarity.  Difficulties  will  accumulate  fast  enough,  and  I  snbmit 
with  all  deference  that  it  is  a  mistake  to  convert  the  learning  of 
any  foreign  langiiage  into  an  obstacle  race,  by  dehberately  throwing 
difficulties  into  the  path  of  the  learner.  Latin,  at  any  rate,  is  hard 
enough  in  itself.  And  a  habit  of  thoughilcssness  is  surely  the  last 
thing  that  will  be  encouraged  by  a  meihod  such  as  that  sketched 
above,  by  which  learning  is  made  a  matter  of  observation  from  the 
first,  and  not  of  uninteliigent  memorizing. 

It  goes  without  saying  that  the  grammar  to  be  taught  in  such 
a  book  should  be  Hmited  to  the  necessary  and  normal.  AIl  ihat 
is  in  any  way  superfluous  to  the  beginncr  should  be  rigorouily 
excluded.  But  so  soon  as  a  general  view  of  the  whole  field  of 
regular  accidence  and  the  bare  outUnes  of  syntax  has  been  attained 
by  way  of  the  Reader,  the  time  has  arrived  for  taking  the  pupil 
over  the  same  ground  again,  as  presented  in  the  systematic  form 
of  the  grammar.  He  is  now  in  a  position  to  understand  what  a 
grammar  really  is — not  a  collection  of  arbitrary  rules,  but  a 
catalogue    raisonne   of  the    usages   of  a   language    based    upon 


20     NEWER    METHODS   IN    THE    TEACHING   OF   LATIN 

observation  and  simplified  by  science.  Successive  recapitulations 
should  take  in  more  and  more  of  what  is  abnormal,  until  a  fairly 
comprehensive  view  of  the  whole  field  is  obtained.  The  suggestions 
of  whatever  new  texts  are  read  should,  of  course,  be  utilised  in 
preparing  the  mind  for  irregularities  and  exceptions  ;  but  it  is  no 
longer  perilous  to  study  the  grammar  apart.  Each  course  of 
grammar  deepens  the  impression  made  by  those  which  precede  it, 
and  at  the  same  time  extends  the  pupil's  mental  horizon,  the 
successive  courses  being  superimposed  on  one  another  like  a 
number  of  concentric  circles  with  ever  widening  diameters. 

I  have  said  nothing  about  the  writing  of  Latin,  because  it  is 
obvious  at  the  present  day  that  reading  should  be  accompanied  by 
writing  from  the  first,  and,  what  is  even  more  important,  that  the 
sentences  to  be  translated  into  Latin  should  be  based  on  ihe 
subject  matter  and  vocabulary  of  the  Reader.  Learning  a 
language  is  largely  an  imitative  process,  and  we  must  not  expect 
our  beginners  to  make  bricks  \\-ithout  straw,  any  more  than  we 
expect  pupils  at  a  more  advanced  age  to  compose  in  the  style  of 
Cicero  or  Livy  without  giving  them  plenty  of  models  to 
work  upon.  It  is  more  important  to  insist  here  on  the  import- 
ance  of  training  the  organs  of  speech  and  hearing  even  in 
learning  a  "  dead  language "  like  Latin.  For  a  dead  language 
is  still  a  language,  and  cannot  be  properly  grasped  unless  it  has 
some  contact  with  Uving  lip  and  Hving  ear.  Let  the  pupil 
then  become  accustomed  from  the  first  to  reading  Latin  aloud, 
and  to  reading  it  with  intelligence  and  expression.  It  is  a 
habit  which  does  not  come  of  itself;  but  to  teach  it  goes 
a  long  way  towards  making  the  language  live  again,  and  acts 
as  a  most  valuable  support  to  the  memory.  Let  anyone  try 
learning  a  httle  modern  Greek,  and  he  will  appreciate  the 
difference  between  remembering  the  accents  by  ear  and  remem 
bering  them  by  the  eye  alone.  So,  too,  in  regard  to  forms 
and  vocabulary.      What  we  have  to  familiarise  our  pupils  with  is 


NEWER   METHODS   IN   THE   TEACHING   OF   LATIN     21 

not  merely  the  look  of  the  word  and  the  phrase  and  the  sentence 
on  paper,  but  still  more,  the  shape  of  them  to  the  ear. 

From  the  point  of  view  of  the  Universily  a  reform  in  school 
procedure,  both  on  the  literary  and  on  the  grammatical  side, 
would  confer  great  and  lasting  benefits.  *  There  must  be  many 
University  teachers  who,  like  the  present  writer,  feel  dissatisfied 
with  the  scrappy  and  haphazard  knowledge  of  the  classics 
commonly  presented  by  students  reading  for  Pass  degrees.  But 
the  foundations  must  be  laid  during  the  long  school  course,  as  the 
developed  flower  must  be  present  in  the  germ.  By  not  hurrying 
over  the  initial  stages,  and  by  a  wise  guidance  of  the  later  steps,  the 
consummation  of  a  worthy  classical  culture  may  be  reached  in  the 
end. 

Christmas,  1900.  E.  A.  Sonnknschein. 


*  Professor  Postgate  (Classical  Review,  February,  1901)  demands  a 
"  thorough  revision  of  the  niodes  and  materials  of  classical  and  especially 
elementary  classical  teaching,"  adding,  "  Though  we  of  the  Universities  have 
a  serious  grievancc  against  the  schools  in  that  they  send  us  so  many  mistaught 
on  elementary  points,  and,  what  is  worse,  emptied  of  all  desire  to  learn,  we 
must  Dot  forgct  our  own  deficicDcies. " 


NOTE  TO  THE  SIXTH  EDITION. 

In  the  present  issue  of  this  book  I  have,  in  de/crence  to  the 
wishes  o/  niany  teachers,  reiurtied  io  t/ie  principle  of  marking  long 
voivels  in  the  text,  which  I  adopted  in  mv  Parallel  Grammar 
Series.  As  to  the  method  of  carrying  out  the  principle  I  have 
stated  my  views  in  the  Preface  (p.  vii). 

/  have  also  corrected  one  or  two  oversights  to  which  I  had 
called  attention  in  previous  issues  {p.  iig,  l.  i,  '  sonieti?nes  not' 
for  '  not  always  '  ;  /.  123,  II.  4  and  S  nf%  23,  '  tenthfor  seventh '). 
On  p.  48,  l.  j,  I  have  substituted  '  multa  ex  navigiis  '  for  '  magnus 
nufnerus  Jiavigiorum'  in  order  to  avoid  raising  a  difficulty  of  con- 
struction.  And  there  are  a  few  other  niinor  iniprovements  of  this 
kind  (p.  130,  §  31  B ;  p.  144  bottom).  Biit  in  all  essentials  t/ie 
book  is  unchanged. 

I  herezvith  express  my  cordial  t/ia?iks  to  t/iose  teac/iers  w/io  /lave 
pointed  out  to  me  misprinis  or  omissions  in  t/ie  vocabu/aries — in 
particu/ar  to  Professor  Postgaie,  Mr.  F.  E.  A.  Trayes,  Mr.  R.  S. 
Haydon,  Aliss  A.  F.  E.  Sanders.  T/iese  oversig/its — fiot  very 
many  in  number — have  a//  been  corrected  in  t/ie  present  issue. 

May  I  ca/l  the  attention  oj  ieac/iers  to  the  mistake,  into  which 
pupils  easi/y  fal/,  of  pronouncing  t/ie  word  '  Alaritinia  '  /ike  t/ie 
Frenc/i  '  marititne  '  wi(/i  t/ie  accent  o?i  the  syi/abie  ti-^  i?istead  0/ 
Maritii?ia  ? 


ORA    MARITIMA 

VFiL 

COMMENTARII   DE  VITA  MEA  AD 

DUBRAS  ANNO  MDCCCXCIX 


DkA    MaKITIMA    INTIiR    DlMlRAS    II  1     Rl)l  L' l'I  AS. 

I.  Ora  maritima. 

[First  Declcnsion  of  -Nouns  and  Afljeclivcs,  togeih  r  wilh  llie  Picsent 
Intlicative  oi  siiin  and  of  ihe  First  Conjugation.] 

1.  Quam  bella  est  dra  iiiaritinia  !  Non  procul 
ab  ora  niaritima  cst  \illa.  In  \illa  amita  mca 
habitat  ;  ct  ego  cum  amitfi  mcfi  nunc  hal)ito.  Ante 
ianuam    villae    est    area.     In   area  est    castanca,  ubi 


24 


ORA    MARITIMA 


luscinia  inteiduni  canlat.  Sub  umbra  castaneae  ancilla 
interdum  cenam  parat.  Amo  oram  maritimam  ;  amo 
villam  bellam. 

2.  Feriae  nunc  sunt.  Inter  ferias  in  villa 
maritima  habito.  O  beatas  ferias !  In  arena  orae 
maritimae  sunt  ancorae  et  catenae.  Nam  incolae 
5rae  maritimae  sunt  nautae.  Magna  est  audacia 
nautarum  :  procellas  non  formldant.  Nautas  amo,  ut 
nautae  me  amant.  Cum  nautls  interdum  in  scaphls 
navigo. 


(T 


=\ 


\ 


w 


k 

rf 


■<  /^ 


Anxora  et  Catena— Scaimia. 


3.  Ex  fenestris    villae    undas    spectas.     Undas 
caeruleas  amo.     Quam  magnae  sunt,  quam  perlucidae ! 


ORA     MAKITIMA  2$ 

Post  cenam  lunain  et  stellas  ex  fenestra  mea  specto. 
Prope  villam  est  silva,  ubi  cum  amita  mea  saepe 
ambulo.  Quantopere  nos  silva  delectat !  O  copiam 
plantarum  et  herbarum  !  O  copiam  bacarum  !  Non 
solum  nautae  sed  etiam  agricolae  circum  habitant. 
Casae  agricolarum  parvae  sunt.  Xautae  casas  albas 
habitant.  Amita  mea  casas  agricolarum  et  nautarum 
saepe  vlsitat. 

4.  Victoria  est  reglna  mea.  Magna  est  gloria 
Victoriae  Reginae,  non  solum  in  insulls  Britannicls 
sed  etiam  in  India,  in  Canada,  in  AustraHa,  in  Africa, 
ubi  coloniae  Britannicae  sunt.  Reglna  est  domina 
muitarum  terrarum.  Britannia  est  domina  undarum. 
In  gloria  reglnae  meae  triumpho.  Te,  Britannia, 
amo  :  v5s,  insulae  Britannicae,  amo.  Sed  Britannia 
non  est  patria  niea.     Ex  Africa  Merldiana  sum. 

5.  Lydia  quoque,  consobrlna  mea,  apud  amitam 
meam  nunc  habitat.  Lydia  columbas  curat  :  cura 
columbarum  Lydiae  magnam  laetitiam  dat.  Tu, 
Lydia,  cum  apud  magistram  tuam  es,  linguae  Franco- 
gallicae  et  linguae  Anglicae  operam  das  ;  sed  ego 
linguls  antiquls  Romae  et  Graeciae  operam  do.  Saepe 
cum  Lydia  ad  silvam  vel  ad  oram  maritimam  ambulo. 
Interdum  cum  nauta  in  scapha  navigamus.  Ouant- 
opere  nos  undae  caeruleae  delectant !  Lydia  casas 
agricolarum  cum  amita  mea  interdum  vlsitat.  Vos, 
flHae  agricolarum,  Lydiam  amatis,  ut  Lydia  vos  amat. 
Ubi  inopia  est,  ibi  amita  mea  inopiam  levat. 


26  ORA    MARITIMA 

IL  Patruus  meus. 

[Second  Declension  ;  Nouns  and  Adjectives  in  us]. 

6.  Patruus  meus  quondam  praefectus  erat  in 
Africa  Merldiana.  Nunc  mllitia  vacat,  et  agello  suo 
operam  dat.  Agellus  patrul  mel  non  magnus  est. 
Circum  villam  est  hortus.  Murus  hortl  non  altus  est. 
Rlvus  est  prope  hortum,  unde  aquam  portamus,  cum 
hortum  irrigamus.  In  horto  magnus  est  numerus 
rosarum  et  violarum.  Rosae  et  violae  tibi,  mi  patrue, 
magnam  laetitiam  dant.  Tu,  Lydia,  cum  patruo  meo 
in  hortd  saepe  ambulas. 

7.  In  angulo  hortl  sunt  uhnl.  In  uhiils  corvl 
nldificant.  Corvos  hbenter  specto,  cum  circum  nldos 
su5s  voHtant.  Magnus  est  numerus  corvorum  in 
horto  patrul  mel ;  muhl  mergi  super  oceanum  voHtant. 
Vos,  mergl,  Hbenter  spect5,  cum  super  oceanum 
voiitatis  et  praedam  captatis.  Oceanus  mergls  cibum 
dat.  Patruum  meumhortus  et  agehus  suus  deleciant ; 
in  ageHS  sunt  equl  et  vaccae  et  porcl  et  gaUl  gahlnae- 
que.  Lydia  gah^s  gaHlnasciue  curat.  Non  procul 
ab  agell5  est  vlcus,  ubi  rusticl  habitant.  N5nnulll  ex 
rusticls  agellum  cum  equls  et  vaccls  et  porcls 
curant, 

8.  Ex  hort5  patrul  mel  scopul5s  alb5s  5rae 
maritimae  spectamus.  Scopull  sunt  altl.  ¥a  5ra 
Francogallica  n5n  procul  abest.  -Noctu  ex  scoi^ulls 
phar5s  5rae  Lrancogallicae  spectamus,  velut  stellas 
claras  in  ocean5.     Quam  bellus  es,  5ceane,  cum  luna 


ORA    MARITIMA 


27 


undas  tuas  illustrat !  Quantopere  me  delectat  vos, 
undae  caeruleae,  spectare,  cum  tranquillae  estis  et 
arcnam  orae  maritimae  lavatis !  Quantopere  me 
delectatis  cum  turbulentae  estis  et  sub  scopulis 
spumatis  et  murmuratis  ! 


!h^-     .v-...'/.M:r^"^:^ 


VlLLA    MaRITIMA. 

Ulmi  kt  Corvi.      Murus.       Ianua.       Rivus,       Castanea.       Mergi. 


28 


ORA    MARITIMA 


III.  Monumenta  antiqua. 

[Nouns  and  Adjectives  in  tun']. 

9.  Agellus  patrul  mel  in  Cantio  est,  inter 
Dubras  et  Rutupias  situs.  Dubrae  et  Rutupiae 
oppida  antlqua  sunt.  Multa  sunt  monumenta  antlqua 
in  Britannia,  multa  vestlgia  R5man5rum.  Reliquiae 
villarum,  oppid5rum,  amphitheatr5rum  R5man5rum 
hodie  exstant.  Multae  viae  R5manae  in  Britannia 
sunt.  In  Canti5  est  via  R5mana  inter  Rutupias  et 
Londinium.  JSolum  Britannicum  multos  numm5s 
aureSs,  arg-ente5s,  aene5s  et  Britann5rum  et  R5man- 
orum  occultat.     Rusticls  numml  saepe  sunt  causa  lucrl, 


NUMMUS    ROMANUS   CUM    FlGURA    BrITANNIAE. 


nummds  romanus. 
(C.Idl.Caesar.)        (Augustus.) 


ORA   MARITIMA 


29 


NuMNfos  Eritannicus. 


NuMMUS  Britaxnicus. 


cum  arant  vel  fundamenta  aedificidrum  antTqu5rum 
exxavant.  Nam  nummos  antlquos  magno  preti5 
venumdant.  Patru5  me5  magnus  numerus  est  numm- 
5rum  R5man5rum. 

10.  Inter  ferias  commentari5s  me5s  de  vlta 
mca  scriptit5.  Dubras  saepe  vlsitamus  ;  nam  oppidum 
non  procul  abest.  Super  oppidum  est  castellum  mag- 
num  ;  in  castell5  est  specula  antlqua.  Murl  speculae 
altl  et  latl  sunt.  Quondam  erat  pharus  R5man5rum. 
Prope  speculam  est  aedificium  consecratum.  lam 
secund5  saccul5  post  Christum  natum  basilica  Chris- 
tiana  erai. 

11.  Castellum  in  pr5munturi5  5rae  maritimae 
stat.  Post  castellum  sunt  c]lvl  graminel  et  latl.  Ex 
castell5  fretum  Gallicurn  spectas.     Ante  ocul5s  sunt 


30 


ORA    MARITIMA 


vela  alba  multorum  navigiorum  ;  navigia  sunt  Brit- 
annica,  Francogallica,  Germanica,  Belgica.  Nonnulla 
ex  navigils  BritannicTs  "castella"  nominata  sunt. 
Littera  C  in  signo  est.  "  Castella  "  in  Africam  Merldi- 
anam  navigant,  ubi  patria  rnea  est. 


.8jSg»i{*irafl»ma3^isyt: 


CA^rELI.UM    AD    DUBRAS   SITUM. 

IV.  Delectamenta  puerorum. 

[Nouns  and  Adjectives  like  piie?-\ 

12.   In     numero    amlcorum     meorum    sunt     duo 
pucrT.      Marcus,  puer  quattuordccim  annorum,   mihi 


ORA   MARITIMA  31 

praccipuus  amicus  est.  Propc  Dubras  nunc  habitant, 
sed  ex  Caledonia  oriundl  sunt.  Nobls  puerls  feriae 
nunc  sunt  ;  nam  condiscipull  sumus.  Inter  ferias 
liberl  sumus  scholls.  Amfcl  mel  me  saepe  vlsitant,  et 
ego  amlcos  meos  vlsito.  Magna  est  inter  nos  amlcitia. 
Una  ambulamus,  una  in  undls  spiimiferls  natamus, 
cum  non  nimis  asperae  sunt.  Ouantopere  nos  pueros 
ludl  pilarum  in  arena  delectant !  Ut  iuvat  castella 
contra  undas  spumiferas  acdificare  ! 

13.  Nobls  puerls  feriae  plenae  sunt  gaudiorum 
a  mane  usque  ad  vesperum.  Nonnumquam  in  scapha 
cum  Petro  navigamus.  Perrus  est  adulescentulus 
vlginti  annorum.  Petrl  scapha  non  s5lum  remls  sed 
etiam  vells  apta  est.  Plerumque  remigamus,  sed 
ndnnumquam  vcla  damus,  cum  ventus  non  nimis 
asper  est.  Petrus  scapham  gubernat  et  vells  minis- 
trat.     Nos  puerl  scapham  bellam  laudamus  et  amamus. 

14.  Non  procul  a  Dubrls  est  scopulus  altus, 
unde  5ceanum  et  navigia  et  5ram  maritimam  spectas. 
Locus  in  fabula  commemoratus  est,  ubi  Leir,  regulus 
Britann5rum  antiqu5rum,  fortunam  suam  miseram 
depl5rat,  stultitiam  suam  culpat,  fllias  suas  animl 
ingrati  acciisat.  O  fortunam  asperam  !  O  fllias 
impias  !  O  constantiam  Cordcliae  !  Scopulus  ex 
poeta  n5minatus  est.  Nam  in  fabula  est  locus  ubi 
vir  gener5sus,  amlcus  fldus  regull,  de  scopul5  se 
praecipitare  parat  ;  scd  fllius  suus  virum  ex  perlculo 
servat.  Fllium  fldum  laud5et  am5.  N5s  puerl  locum 
saepe  vlsitamus. 


32 


ORA   MARITIMA 


(^ 


=^ 


SCOPULUS   AltUS   At)   DUBRAS   SITUS,    EX   POETA   NOMIXATUS. 

V.  Magister  noster. 

[Nouns  and  Adjectives  like  inagister\ 

15.  Magister  noster  vir  doctus  est,  sed  lud5rum 

peritus.     Nobls  puerls  carus  est.     Inter  ferias  patruum 

meum  interdum  vlsitat.     Dextra  magistrl  nostrl  valida 

est,  et  puerl  pigrl  nec  dextram  nec  magistrum  amant. 

"  Non  amo  te,  Sabidl,  nec  possum  dlcere  quare. 

Hoc  tantum  possum  dlccrc  :  non  amo  te." 
Magistrum     non    amant    quia    libros    Graecos    et 
Latlnos  non  amant.       Nam  discipull  scholae  nostrae 
linguls  antlquls  operam  dant,  atque  scientils  mathe- 


ORA   MARITIMA  33 

maticls.  Magistro  nostro  magna  copia  est  librorum 
pulchrorum.  Schola  nostra  antlqua  et  clara  est  :  non 
solum  librls  sed  etiam  ludls  operam  damus.  Schola 
nostra  non  in  Cantio  est.  In  vlco  nostro  est  ludus 
litterarius,  crC-bcr  puerls  et  puellis,  llberls  agricolarum, 
Sed  ego  cum  i\Iarc6  et  Alexandro,  amlcls  mels,  ad 
\'cntam  Bclgarum  discipulus  sum. 

VI.  Britannia  antiqua. 

[Mixed  forms  of  Nouns  an  1  Adjectives  of  the  isf  and  2nd  Declensions, 
logether  with  the  Past  loipcrfect  Indicaiive  of  suin  anJ  of  the 
ist  Conjugation.] 

IG.  Magister  noster  librorum  historicorum 
studiosus  est ;  dc  patria  nostra  antlqua  libenter  narrat. 
Proximo  anno,  dum  apud  nos  erat,de  vlta  Britannorum 
antlquorum  saepe  narrabat.  Patruus  meus  et  amita 
mea  libenter  auscultabant ;  ego  quoque  nonnumquam 
aderam.     Slc  narrabat  : — 

"  Fere  tota  Britannia  quondam  silvls  densls  crebra 
erat.  Inter  5ram  maritimam  et  fluvium  Tamesam, 
ubi  nunc  agrl  frugiferl  sunt,  silva  erat  Anderida,  locus 
vastus  et  incultus.  Silvae  plenae  erant  ferarum — 
.„porum,  ursdrum,  cervorum,  aprorum.  Multa  et  varia 
...ateria  erat  in  silvls  Britannicls  :  sed  fagus  Britannls 
antlquls  n5n  erat  n5ta,  sl  Gaius  luHus  vera  affirmat. 
Et  plnus  Sc5tica  dcerat." 

17.  "  Solum,  ubi  llberum  erat  silvls,  frugiferum 
erat.  Metallls  quoque  multls  abundabat — plumbo  aibo 


Br1TAN.nI    A.NTKJUJ 


ORA    MARITIMA  35 

et  ferro,  atque,  ut  Tacitvis  affirmat,  auro  argentoque, 
Margarltas  et  ostreas  dabat  oceanus :  niarg-arltae 
parvae  erant,  sed  ostreae  magnae  et  praeclarae, 
Caelum  tum  quoque  crebrls  pluvils  et  nebulls  atrls 
foedum  erat ;  sed  prulnae  asperae  aberant,  NatQra 
oceanl  '  pigra  '  erat,  sl  tcstimonium  Tacitl  verum  est : 
nautae  Romanl,  inc^uit,  in  aqua  pigra  vix  poterant 
remigare.  Sed  verunme  est  testimonium  ?  An  natura 
nautfirum  Romandrum  non  satis  impigra  erat ,'' " 

18.  "  Incolae  antlqul  insulae  nostrae  ferl  et 
bellicSsI  erant.  Hastls,  sagittls,  essedls  inter  se 
pugnabant.  Proelia  Britannos  antlquos  delectabant, 
Multl  et  dlversl  erant  populi  Britannorum,  Multl 
ex  populls  erant  Celtae.  Celtls  antlquls,  slcut  Ger- 
manls,  capilli  flavi,  ocull  caerulei,  membra  magna 
et  robusta  erant.  SlcTacitus  de  Caledoniis  narrat, 
Incolae  Cambriae  meridianae  '  coloratl '  erant,  Sed 
Romanls  statura  parva,  oculi  et  capilli  nigri  erant, 
Universi  Britanni,  ut  Gaius  lulius  affirmat,  membra 
vitro  colorabant,  sicut  nautae  nostrl  hodiernl.  Vestl- 
menta  ex  corils  ferarum  constabant,  In  casis  parvls 
circum  silvas  suas  habitabant." 

19.  Ilic  amita  mea  "  Nonne  in  oppidls  habit- 
abant  ^  "  inquit,  Et  ille  "  Oppida  aedificabant,"  inquit 
"sed,  si  Gaius  IQHus  vcra  affirmat,  oppida  Britann- 
orum  antiquorum  loca  firmata  erant,  non  loca  uhi 
habitabant.  Sed  Britannia  merldiana  crebra  erat 
incohs  et  acdificiis.  Slc  narrat  Cacsar  in  libro  quinto 
Belh  GaHicI.  Mukl  una  hal:)itribant,  ut  puto."  "  Itaque 
non    planc    barbarl    erant,"    inquit    amita    mea,     \Fa 


56 


Or.A   ISIARITBIA 


ille :  "  Incolae  Cantil  agn  culturae  operam  dabant, 
atque  etiam  mercaturae.  Nam  Venetl  ex  Gallia.  in 
Britanniam  mercaturae  causa  navigabant.  Britann! 
frumentum,  armenta,  aurum,  argentum,  ferrum,  coria, 
catul5s  venaticos,  servos  et  captlvos  expoitabant  ; 
frena,  vitrea,  gemmas,  cetera  importabant.  Itaque 
mediocriter  hijmanl  erant,nec  multum  dlversl  a  Gallls.' 


URNAE  ET  CATKNAIi:  Britannicae. 


Druiuai:  liKHA.NMci. 


38  oi;a  jmauiti.ma 

20.  "  Multl  mortuos  cremabant,  slcut  Graecl  et 
Romanl :  exstant  in  Cantio  sepulchra  cum  urnls 
pulchre  ornatls.  Exstant  etiam  numml  Britannicl, 
aurel,  argentel,  aenel.  Esseda  quoque  fabricabant : 
non  plane  inhumanl  erant,  sl  rotas  ferratas  essed- 
orum  et  nummos  aureos  aeneosque  fabricare  poterant. 
Britannls  antlquls  magnus  numerus  gallorum  gallln- 
arumque  erat  ;  animl,  non  escae,  causa  curabant,  ut 
Gaius  luHus  afifirmat.  Scd  incolae  mediterraneorum 
et  Caledonil  ferl  et  barbari  erant.  Mortuos  humabant. 
Agrl  culturae  operam  non  dabant  ;  n5n  frumento  sed 
ferlna  victitabant.  Dc5rum  fana  in  lucls  sacrls  et  silvls 
atrls  erant.  Sacra  ciirabant  Druidae.  Sacra  erant 
saeva:  vir5s,  feminas,  llber5s  pr5  victimls  sacrificabant. 
Inter  se  saepe  pugnabant  ;  captlv5s  miser5s  venum- 
dabant,  vel  cruciabant  et  trucldabant  :  n5nnumquam 
simulacra  magna,  plena  victimls  humanls,  cremabant. 
Popul5rum  inter  se  discordiae  victoriam  R5man5rum 
parabant." 

VII.  Vestigia  Romanorum. 

[Faliirc  Indicalive  and  Imperalive  of  sjim  and  of  Ihe  isl  Conjugation]. 

21.  Nuper,  dum  Marcus  et  Alexander  mecum 
erant,  patru5  me5  "  Ouantoperc  me  dclectabit"  inquam 
"locum  vlsitare  ubi  oppidum  R5manum  quondam 
stabat."  Et  Alexander  "  Monstra  n5bls,"  inquit 
"  amabo  te,  rulnas  castelll  Rutuplni."  Tum  patruus 
meus  "  Longa  est  via,"  inquit  "  scd  aliquando  mon- 
strab5.  Cras,  .sl  v5bls  gratum  erit,  ad  locum  ubi 
proclium    erat    Britannorum    cum    R5manls    ambul- 


ORA    ^rARITI.MA  ,  39 

ribimus.  Ambulabitisnc  ndblscum,  Marcc  et  Alcx- 
andcr  ?  "  "Ego  ver5  "  inquit  Marcus  "  tecum  libentcr 
ambulabo  "  ;  et  Alexander  "  Mihi  quoquc  pergratum 
crit,  sl  n5bls  sepulchra  Britann5rum  et  R^manorum 
monstrabis."  Sed  patruus  meus  "  Festlna  lentc " 
inquit ;  "  nullae  sunt  ibi  rcliquiae  sepulchrorum,  et 
virT  doctl  de  loc5  procHl  disputant.  Sed  quota  hora 
paratl  critis  ?  "     "  Ouinta  liora  "  inquiunt. 

22.  Postrldie  caekmi  scrcnum  erat.  Intcr  ienta- 
culum  amita  mea  "  Quota  h5ra"  inquit  "  in  viam 
v5s  dabitis  ?  et  quota  h5ra  ccnare  poteritis  ?  "  Et 
patruus  mcus  "  Quinta  h5ra  Marcus  et  Alcxandcr 
Dubrls  adventabunt  ;  intra  duas  h5ras  ad  locum 
prochl  ambulare  poterimus  ;  post  unam  h5ram  red- 
ambulabimus  ;  itaque  h5ra  decima  vel  undecima  doml 
crimus,  ut  sper5."  Tum  ego  "  N5nne  ieiunl  erimus," 
inquam  "  sl  nihil  ante  vesperum  gustabimus  ? " 
"  Prandium  v5blscum  portate"  inquit  amita  mea ; 
"  cgo  crustula  et  p5ma  curab5." 


[Perfcct  Indicative  of  si/m  ancl  of  the  ist  Conjugalion.] 

23.  Quinta  hora  appropinquabat,  et  amlc5s 
me5s  cupide  exspectabam.  Ad  sonum  tintinnabull 
ad  fenestram  propcravl.  Ecce,  pucrl  ad  ianuam 
adcrant.  Cum  intravcrunt,  univcrsl  exclamavimus 
"  Eugc  !  Opportunc  advcntavistis  !  "  Tum  Marcus 
"  Nuni  scr5  advcntavimus  ?  "  inquit ;  "  liora  fere  tertia 
fuit  cum  in  viam  n5s  dedimus ;  scd  via  longa  est, 
ct  Alcxander  celcritcr  ambularc  n5n  potest."  Sed 
Alcxander  "  N5n  sum  fatlgatus  "  inquit;  "  scd  quota 


40 


ORA    MARITI.MA 


liora  est  ? "  Tum  patruus  meus  "  Nondum  quinta 
h5ra  est  "  inquit ;  "  paratlne  cstis  ad  ambulandum  ?  " 
Et  Alexander  "  Nos  vero  !  "  inquit.  Tum  amita  mea 
et  Lydia  "  Bene  ambulate ! "  inc-iuiunt,  et  in  viam 
nos  dedimus. 


C.  luLius  Caf.sar. 


24.  Inter  viam  patruus  meus  multa  nobis  de  bello 
Romanorum  cum  Britannls  narravit.  Prlm5  saeculo 
ante  Chriscum  natum  Gaius  lulius  in  GalHa  bcHabat, 
et,  postquam  Nervi5s  ceter5sque  popul5^  CialHae 
Belgicae  debellavit,  bcHum  contra  incolas  insulac 
propinquae  paravit.  Itaque  ann5  quint5  et  quinqua- 
gesimo    c5pias     suas    in    Britanniam    transportavit. 


OKA  ^rAKrri.NrA 


41 


t)e  loco  unde  navigfivit  et  dc  loc5  quo  navigia 
.sua  applicavit,  viii  doctl  diCi  disputavcrunt.  Scd 
intcr  Dubras  et  Rutupias  est  locus  ad  navigia 
applicanda  idoneus.  Dubras  non  poterat  applicare  ; 
nam  .scopull  ibi  altl  erant,  ut  nunc  sunt,  et  in  scoinills 
copiae  armatae  Britannorum  stabant.  Itaquc  ad 
alium  locum  naviyavit,  ubi  nulli  scopull  fucrunt. 
Sed  Britannl  quociuc  per  oram  maritimam  ad 
locum  properavcrunt,  et  ad  pugnam  sc  paravcrunt. 
Romanls  necessc  erat  navigia  sua  magna  ad  ancoras 
deligare.  Britannls  vada  nota  fucrunt ;  itaque  in 
aquam  equilavcrunt  ct  copiam  pugnae  dederunt. 


J\vl  '■%  x'(  ~^-^^l\ 


BkITANNI    RO.MANOS   IN   SC01'ULIS   E.KSriiCTANT. 


42 


ORA    MAraTIMA 


[riuperfect    {t.e.     P.ist    Perfect)    Inclicative    of   siiin   and    of    the     Ist 
Conjugauon.] 

25.  Scd  iam  ad  locum  adventav^cramus,  et 
patruus  meus  "  Spectate  puetl  "  inquit;  "  hlc  campus 
apertus  est ;  scopull  desunt,  et  locus  idoneus  est  ad 
copias  explicandas.  Illlc  fortasse,  ubi  scaphas  pisca- 
torias  spectatis,  Gaius  lulius  navigia  R5mana  ad 
ancoras  deHgaverat.  Hlc  Britannl  copias  suas  col- 
locaverant,  et  equos  in  aquam  incitaverant.  N5nne 
potestis  t5tam  pugnam  animo  spectare  .''  Sed  reliqua 
narrab5.  Dum  R5manl  undls  se  dare  dubitant, 
aquilifer  '  Ad  aquilam  v5s  congregate,'  inquit  *  nisi 
ignavl  estis.     Ego  certe   ofiiciuni    meum    praestab5.' 


AOflLlFEIi   SE    U.NDIS    UAT. 


ORA    MARITIMA 


43 


Et  cum  aquila  undTs  se  dcclit.  lani  univcrsl  RonianT 
ad  aquilifcrum  sc  congreg-averant,  et  cum  Britannls 
in  imdls  impigrc  pugnabant.  Confusa  et  aspera  fuit 
i5ugna.  Prlmo  iaborabant  Romanl ;  sed  tandcm  Brit- 
annos  propulsaverunt  et  terram  occupavcrunt,  Antc 
vcsperum  Britannl  se  fugae  dederant.  Numquam 
antea  copiae  Romanae  in  solo  Britannico  stetcrant. 
Audacia  aquilifcrl  laudanda  erat." 


[Future  Perfect  Indicative  oi  stim  and  of  the  ist  Conjugation.J 

26.  Sed  nos  puerl  prandium  iam  postulabamus  : 
nam  hora  iam  septima  erat.  Ouam  bella  crustula 
ct  poma  tu,  amita,  dederas  !  Ouantopere  nos  bacae 
rubrac  ct  nigrae  delectaverunt !  Tum  patruus  mcus 
"  Cum  nos  recreaverimus,"  inquit  "  domum  propcr- 
abimus  ;  nam  non  ante  undecimam  hdram  advent- 
averimus  ;  interea  amita  tua,  ml  Antonl,  nos  exspcct- 
averit.  Nonne  pranchd  satiatl  estis  V  Tum  cgo  "  Nulla 
in  mc  mora  fucrit."  Et  Alcxandcr  "  Ego  iam  parfitus 
sum  "  inquit  ;  "  sed  quando  tu,  ^larcc,  satiatus  cris  .'  " 
Tum  Marcus  "  Iciunus  ful  "  inquit  ;  "  nam  pcr  quinquc 
horas  nihil  gustaveram.  Scd  cum  me  altcro  pomo 
rccrcavero,  paratus  cro.  Tfi,  Alcxandcr,  inlcr  viam 
crustulls  operam  dcdistl ;  nam  pucr  parvus  es."  Nos 
cacliinnanuis,  ct  mox  in  \iam  nos  damus. 

VIII.   Expeditio  prima  C.  lalii  Caesaris, 

[^rd  Declensii»;!  :   noiins  like  Caciar,  iui/enUor,  sii',  r.r/iri/://i'>.] 

27.  Scd  magnus  crat  calor  sohs  ct  acris,  ncqi  c 
poteramus  celcritcr  ambularc.  Paulo  post  ncbulac 
solcm    obscuraverunt,   et    imber    magnus  fuit.     I\Iox 


44  OKA    MARITIMA 

« 

sol  5ram  maritiniani  splcndore  suo  illustravit,  et 
iterum  in  viam  n5s  dedimus.  Imber  cal5rem  aeris 
temperavcrat ;  et  intcr  viam  n5s  puerl  patruum  mcum 
multa  de  C.  Iuli5  Caesare,  imperatore  magn5  R5man- 
5rum,  intcrrogavimus.  "  Ciar  expedlti5nem  suam  in 
Britanniam  paravit .''  "  inquinius  ;  "  cur  c5pias  suas  in 
insulam  nostram  transportiivit  ? "  Et  patruus  meus 
"  C.  lulius  Caesar  "  inquit  "  pr5consul  erat  Galliac,  et 
per  tres  ann5s  contra  nati5nes  bellic^sas  Gallorum 
et  Belgarum  bellaverat  ;  nam  ann5  duodesexagesim5 
ante  Christum  natum  R5manl  Caesarem  pr5consulem 
creaverant.  R5mani  autem  Britann5s  in  numer5 
Gall5rum  esse  existimabant ;  et  revera  n5nnullae  ex 
nati5nibus  Britanniae  merldianae  a  Belgls  oriundae 
crant.  Atque  Britannl  Gallls  auxilia  contra  R5manos 
interdum  subministraverant;  sed  Trinobantes  auxil- 
ium  R5man5rum  contra  Cassivellaunum,  regulum 
Cassorum,  imploraverant." 

28.  "  Alia  quoque  causa  belll  fucrat  avaritia  et 
exspectati5  praedae.  Cupidl  erant  R^manl  insulam 
nostram  ign5tam  et  rem5tam  vlsitandl  et  cxpl5randl  ; 
nam,  ut  Tacitus  affirmat,  ign5tum  pr5  magnific5  cst. 
Itaquc  ann5  quint5  ct  quinquagesim5  antc  Christum 
natum  C.  lulius  Caesar  expedlti5nem  suam  prlmam 
contra  Britann5s  comparavit,  ct  vict5riam  reportavit, 
ut  narravl ;  nam  post  unum  proelium  Britannl  veniam 
avict5ribus  imploraverunt.  Sed  expcdlti5  n5n  magna 
fuerat ;  neque  R5manl  ullam  pracdam  ex  Britannia 
reportavcrant,  nisi  pauc5s  servos  et  captlv5s.  Anno 
igitur    proxim5    imi)crator    Romanus    secundam    et 


ORA    MARITIMA  45 

multo  maiorein  expeditionem  in  Britanniam  paravit. 
Nam  sescenta  navigia  oneraria  in  Gallia  aedificavit, 
et  quinque  legiones  Romanas  una  cum  mag-na  multi- 
tudine  auxiliorum  Gallicorum  in  oram  Bclgicam  con- 
gregavit." 

IX.    Pax  violata. 

[3rd  Declension  continued  :  nouns  hke  puj:,  aesias,  mlUs.] 

29.  "  Britannl  paccm  non  violaverant,  scd  Ro- 
mani  pacis  non  cupidl  erant.  Itaque  aestate  anni 
quarti  et  quinquagesiml  ante  Christum  natum  dux 
Romanus  cum  quinque  legionibus  militum  Roman- 
orum  et  magnd  numerd  equitum  et  auxiliorum  Gallic- 
orum  iterum  in  Britanniam  navigavit.  Tempestas 
erat  idonea,  sed  in  media  navigatione  ventus  non 
iam  flabat  ;  itaque  militibus  necesse  erat  navigia 
remls  incitare.  Impigre  remigaverunt,  et  postrldie 
navigia  ad  oram  Britannicam  prospere  applicaverunt. 
Labor  remigandl  magnus  erat,  virtus  mllitum  magn- 
opere  laudanda.  Britannl  Romanos  in  scopulls  orae 
maritimae  exspectabant ;  sed  postquam  multitudinem 
navigiorum  et  mllitum  equitumque  spectaverunt,  in 
fugam  se  dederunt.  Caesar  navigia  sua  inter  Dubras 
et  Rutupias  applicavit,  ut  puto,  non  procul  a  loco  quo 
pri5re  anno  applicaverat.  Inde  contra  Britannos  pro- 
peravit.  Interea  unam  legidnem  cum  trecentls  equit- 
ibus  ad  castra  in  stati5ne  reservabat  :  nam  perlcul- 
osum  erat  navigia  ad  ancoras  deligata  defens5ribus 
nudare," 


-46 


ORA   MARITIMA 


Castra  Romana. 

X.    Certamina  varia. 

[yd  Declension  conlinucd  :  nouns  Vike  flilmai,  tempjis.] 

.'»0.  "  BiitannT  certamen  vltaverunt,  et  in  silvTs 
se  occLiltavcrunt,  ubi  locus  erat  prope  flumen,  egregie 
et  natura  et  opere  firmatus.  Itaque  '  oppidum  '  Brit- 
annicum  erat.  De  nomine  fluminis  nihil  constat. 
Oppidum  iam  ante  domesticl  belll  causa  praepar- 
averant,  et  crebrls  arboribus  vallTsque  firmavcrant, 
Multa  et  varia  certamina  fuerunt :  Britannl  ex 
silvls  cum  equitibus  essedTsque  suTs  contra  Romanos 
provolabant  ;  Romanls  perTculosum  erat  intrii  munlt- 
iones    Britannorum    intrare.       Scd    post    aliquantum 


ORA   MARITIMA 


47 


temporis  mTlitcs  septimac  lcgionis  aggere  et  testudine 
locum  oppugnavcrunt.  Tandem  Britannos  ex  silvls 
propulsavcrunt.  Pauca  crant  vulnera  Romanorum  : 
nam  Romanl  Britannos  pondcre  armorum  et  scientia 
pug-nandl  multum  superabant ;  magnitudine  et  robore 
corporis  Britannl  Romanos  superabant.  Sed  Romanl 
quoque  homines  robust5  corpore  erant." 


ESSEDU.M    BUITANMCC.M. 

31.  "  Vict5ria  Cacsarl  non  multum  pr5fuit  :  nam 
Britannls  fugatls  instarc  n5n  potcrat,  quia  naturam  locl 
ign5rabat.  Praeterea  praefectus  castr5rum,  n5mine 
Ouintus  Atrius,  magnum  incommodum  nuntiavcrat : 
tcmpestas  navigia  in  lltorc  afflictaverat.  Tem  "(us 
pcrlcul5sum  crat  ;  nam  Cacsarl  nccessc  erat  a  flumine 


48  ORA    MARITIMA 

ad  iTtus  maritimum  properarc,  et  legiones  suas 
ab  insectatione  Britannorum  revocare.  ]\Iulta  ex 
navigils  in  vadls  afflictata  erant ;  cetera  novls 
armls  ornanda  erant.  Opus  mag-ni  laboris  erat,  et 
aliquantum  temporis  postulabat.  Sed  nautarum  atque 
militum  virtijs  magno  opere  laudanda  erat.  Non 
solum  per  diurna  sed  etiam  per  nocturna  tempora 
laboraverunt.  Interea  Caesar  nova  navigia  in  Gallia 
aedificat :  sine  navigils  n5n  poterat  copias  suas  in 
Galliam  reportare;  uno  tempore  necesse  erat  et  navigia 
reparare  et  contra  Britannos  bellare." 

XL    Naves  Romanae, 

[3rd  Declenslon  continued  :   nouns  like  naz^/s.] 

32.  "Duo  erant  generanavium  in  classe  Romana; 
unum  erat  genus  navium  longarum,  alterum  navium 
onerariarum.  Naves  longae  ad  pugnam  aptae  erant, 
naves  onerariae  ad  onera  atque  multitudinem 
hominum  et  equorum  transportanda.  Tota  classis 
Caesaris  octingentarum  erat  navium  ;  nam  sescentas 
naves  onerarias  per  hiemem  in  Gallia  aedificaverat, 
ut  narravl.  Inter  ceteras,  ducentas  numero,  nonnullae 
navcs  longae  erant.  Sed  navibus  longls  revera  non 
opus  crat  Caesarl ;  nam  Britannls  antlquls  nulla  erat 
classis  ;  neque  naves  onerarias  aedificabant."  Tum 
ego  "  Britannia  nondum  domina  undarum  erat " 
inquam  ;  "  sed  quomodo  frumentum  exportare 
poterant,  sl  nullas  navcs  aedificabant  .''  "  "  \'enet- 
orum  naves "  inquit  patruus  meus  "  frumentum 
Britannicum    in     Galliiim    portabant,    et    e.\     (jalliu 


ORA    MARITIMA 


49 


gemmas,  vitrca,  cctcra  in  Britanniam.  Nam  VenctT, 
natio  maritima,  in  ora  Gallica  habitabant.  Hostes 
fucrant  Romanorum,  ct  magnam  classem  com- 
paravcrant." 

33.  Tum  Marcus  "  Num  nati5ncs  barbarae  " 
inquit  "  navcs  lonCTas  ornarc  poterant .''  "  Et  patruus 
mcus  "  Formam  nfivium  Gallicarum  Caesar  in  tertio 
libro  Bclli  GallicT  commemorat.  Puppes  altae  erant, 
ad  magnitudincm  tempestatum  accommodatae  ; 
carTnae  planae.  VcnetT  nilves  totas  ex  rSbore 
fabricabant  ;  ad  ancoras  catenTs  ferrcTs,  non  funibus, 
deligabant.  Pclles  pro  velTs  erant,  sTve  propter  iTnT 
inopiam,  sTvc  quia  in  pellibus  plus  firmitudinis  quam 
in  velTs  iTneTs  erat.  Naves  longae  R5man5rum  n5n 
tam  altae  erant  quam  Venet5rum,  sed  rostrTs  ferreTs 
et  interdum  turribus  armatae  erant ;  itaque  vict5riam 
a  VenetTs  reportaverant."  Tum  Alexander  "  Num 
naves  R5manae  laminTs  ferrcTs  armatae  erant  .''  "  inquit. 
Sed  Marcus  :  "  Ouid  opus  erat  laminTs  ferrcTs,  sT 
tormenta  hodicrna  antTquTs  dcerant  .^  " 


50  ORA    IVIARITIMA 

XII.   Gentium  Britannicarum  Societas. 

[3rd  Declension  continued  :  nouns  Vike  ^cns,  fars]. 

34.  Tum  patruus  meus  reliqua  de  expedltione 
Caesaris  narravit.  "  Dum  milites  nautaeque  Romanl 
classem  novls  armls  ornant,  Caesar  ad  rcliquas  copias 
properat.  Interea  hostes  summum  imperium 
Cassivellaund  mandaverant.  Cassivellaunus  non  erat 
rex  ijniversarum  gentium  Britannicarum,  sed  dux 
vel  princeps  gentis  Cas.sorum.  Anno  tamen  quarto 
et  quinquagesimo  ante  Christum  natum  magna  pars 
gentium  Britanniae  merldianae  se  sub  Cassivellauno 
contra  Romanos  consociaverant.  Flumen  Tamesa 
flnes  Cassivellauni  a  finibus  gentium  maritimurum 
separabat ;  ab  oriente  erant  flnes  Trinobantium  ;  ab 
occidente  Britannl  mediterranel.  Superiore  tempore 
bella  continua  fuerant  inter  Cassivellaunum  et  rcHquas 
gentes  ;  atque  Trinobantes  auxiHum  Romanorum 
contra  CassiveHaunum  imploraverant,  quia  regem 
suum  trucldaverat.  Numerus  hostium  magnus  erat  ; 
nam,  ut  Caesar  afiirmat,  inflnlta  multitudo  hominum 
erat  in  parte  mcrldiana  Britanniae." 

35.  "  Caesar  formam  et  incolas  Britanniae  in 
capite  duodecimo  et  tertio  decimo  librl  quintl  com- 
memorat.  Incolac  partis  interioris  Ccltae  et  barbarl 
erant  ;  incolae  maritimae  partis  ex  Belgio  pracdac 
causa  immigraverant,  slcut  pri5re  aetate  trans  flumen 
Rhenum  in  Bclgium  migraverant.  Kt  nonnulla 
n5mina  gentium  maritimarum,  unde  n5mina  urbium 
hodicrnarum  dCMivfita  sunt,   P>clgica  vel   GaUica  sunt. 


ORA   MARITIMA  5I 

Belgac  autcm  fi  GcimrmTs  oriundl  erant,  ut  Caesar  in 
capite  quart5  librT  secundT  dcMnonstrat.  Itaque  pars 
BritannSrum  antTquorum  Germanica  orTgine  erant. 
Formam  insulae  esse  triquetram  declarat.  Scd 
unum  latus  ad  Galliam  spcctarc  cxistimat,  alterum  ad 
Ilispaniam  atque  occidentem,  tertium  ad  septentriones. 
Itaque  de  lateribus  et  angulls  laterum  errabat. 
Hiberniam  ab  occidcnte  parte  Britanniae  esse  recte 
iudicat,  insulam  Monam  inter  Britanniam  et 
Hiberniam  esse." 

XIII.   Maria  Britannica. 

[3rd  Declension  continiicd  :  nouns  like  mare]. 
3G.  "  Lateris  prlml  longitfidinem  circiter  quin- 
genta  mllia  esse  iudicat,  secundl  scptingenta,  tcrtil 
octingenta.  Itaque  de  magnitiadine  insulae  non 
multum  errabat.  Flumen  Tamesam  a  marl  circiter 
octoginta  mllia  distare  iudicat."  Hlc  nos  puerl 
"  Errabat  igitur  "  inquimus  ;  "  nam  inter  Londinmm  et 
mare  non  sunt  octdginta  mllia."  Sed  patruus  meus 
"Recte  iudicabat"  inquit;  "nam  pars  maris  ubi  Caesaris 
castra  erant  circiter  octoginta  mllia  Romana  a 
Londinio  distat.  Tria  maria  insulam  nostram 
circumdant  ;  inter  Britanniam  et  Galliam  est  mare 
Britannicum  vel  fretum  Gallicum  ;  ab  occidente  mare 
Ilibcrnicum  ;  ab  oriente  mare  Germanicum.  Nomina 
marium  temporibus  antlquTs  n5n  usitata  erant ;  sed 
iam  Graecl  Britanniam  esse  insulam  iudicabant." 

XIV.    Britannia  pacata. 

[Recapilulation  of  nouns  of  ihe  jrd  Declension.] 

37.    "  Inter  Tamesam  et  mare  Britannicum  piTma 


52 


ORA    ^rARITIMA 


concursio  erat  Romanorum  ciim  c5piT.s  Cas.si\-ellaiinT. 
BritannT  duas  cohortcs  Romanas  in  itinere  fortiter  im- 
pugnaverunt.  Ex  silvTssuTs  pr5volaverunt ;  R5man5s 
in  fugam  dcderunt  ;  mult5s  R5man5rum  trucTd- 
averunt.  Tum  su5s  a  pugna  revocaverunt.  Novum 
gcnus  pugnaeR5manbs  perturbaverat.  Nam  BritannTs 
non  mos  erat  iust5  proeli5  pugnare  ;  sed  equitibus 
essedTsque  suTs  per  omnes  partes  equitabant,  et 
ordines  hostium  perturbabant  ;  tum  consulto  c5pias 
suas  revocabant.  EssedariT  interdum  pedibus  pugna- 
bant.  Ita  m5bilitatem  equitum,  stabilitatem  peditum 
in  proeliTs  praestabant.  Pedites  R5map.T  propter 
pondus  arm5rum  n5n  aptT  erant  ad  luiiusmodT  hostem. 


liUllAN.M    CUM    RilMAMS    IN    lll.NKKl':    riHl.NAM-. 


ORA    MARITIM.^  53 

Et  equitibus  Romanls  peiiculosum  erat  se  longo 
intervallo  a  peditibus  scparfire :  neque  pedibus 
pugnare  poterant." 

38.  "  Itaque  Romani  ordincs  suos  contra  equitcs 
Britannorum  in  prlmo  certamine  non  servaverant. 

Sed  postrldie  Romanl  victoriam  reportavcrunt; 
Britannl  in  collibus  prccul  a  castrls  Romanls  stabant. 
Caesar  magnum  numerum  cohortium  et  univcrsos 
equites  lcgato  suo  Trebonio  mandaverat.  Hostes 
subito  provolaverunt,  et  ordincs  Romanos  impugn- 
averunt.  Sed  Romanl  supcriores  fuerunt.  Copias 
Britannicas  propulsaverunt,  et  in  fugam  dedcrunt. 
Magnum  numerum  hostium  trucldaverunt.  Tum  dux 
continuls  itineribus  ad  flumen  Tamesam  et  in  flnes 
Cassivellaunl  properavit.  Cassivellaunus  autem  cum 
quattuor  mlHbus  essedariorum  itinera  Romanorum 
servabat,  ct  paulum  de  via  decllnabat  seque  in  silvls 
occultabat.  Interdum  ex  silvls  provolabat  et  cum 
militibus  Romanls  pugnabat ;  Romanl  autcm  agros 
Britannorum  vastabant." 

39.  "  In  partc  fluminis  Tamcsae  ubi  flncs  Cassi- 
vellaunl  erant  unum  tantum  vadum  erat.  Qu6  cum 
Caesar  adventavit,  copias  hostium  ad  alteram  rlpam 
fliiminis  collocatas  spectavit.  Rlpa  autem  sudibus 
acLitis  firmata  erat ;  ct  Britannl  multas  sudes  sub  aqua 
quoque  occultaverant.  Sed  Caesar  hostibus  instare 
non  dubitavit.  Aqua  fluminis  profunda  erat,  et  milites 
capite  solum  ex  aqua  exstabant ;  sed  Romanl  se  aquae 


54 


ORA   MARITIMA 


fortiter  mandaverunt,  et  Britannos  in  fugam  dederunt. 
'  Oppidum  '  CassivellaunT  non  longe  aberat,  inter  silvas 
paludesque  situm,  quo  Britannl  magnum  numerum 
hominum,  equorum,  ovium,  boum,  congregaverant. 
Locum  egregie  et  natura  et  opere  firmatum  Caesar 
ex  duabus  partibus  oppugnare  properavit :  oppidum 
expugnavit  et  defensores  fugavit." 


BuiTANNI    CASrilA    ROMANA    Ol'1'Lv 


40.  "  Sed  in  Cantio,  ubi  quattuor  rcgcs  Britannls 
praeerant,  nondum  flnis  erat  pugnandl.  Britannl 
castra  Romana  ad  mare  sita  fortitcr  oppugnant ;  sed 
frustra.  Ronianl  victorcs.  Interea  multac  ex  clvitat- 
ibus  Britannicls  pacem  orant.     Trinobantibus  Caesar 


ORA    MARITIMA 


5; 


novum  rcgem  dat,  et  pacem  confirmat.  Itaque  propter 
tot  cladcs,  proptcr  flncs  suos  bello  vastatos,  maxime 
autcm  propter  dcfcctioncm  tot  clvitatum,  Cassivel- 
launus  de  condicionibus  pacis  dcllberat.  Cacsar  paccm 
dat ;  Cassivellaunum  vetat  Trinobantcs  bello  vexare, 
et  tributum  Britannls  imperat.  Tum  copias  suiis  cum 
magn5  numero  obsidum  et  captlvorum  in  Galliam 
reportat.  Britannl  fortiter  sed  frustra  pro  ails  et 
focls  suis  pugnaverant." 


TR0?AKUM    liK.llANMCUM. 


56  ORA   MARITIMA 

XV.    Robur  et  aes  triplex. 

[Adjectives  of  the  3rd  Declension.] 

41.  Tum  Marciis  "ogentem  fortem  ct  admlrabil- 
em  Britanndrum  !"  inquit.  "  Nam  insigne  erat  facinus 
quod  contra  Romanos,  victdres  orbis  terrarum,  tam 
fortiter  et  nonnumcjuam  prospere  pugnaverunt.  Non 
mlrum  est,  sl  R5manl  vict5riam  reportavCM-unt."  Nos 
sententiam  Marcl  comprobavimus.  Sed  iam  n5na  hora 
erat,  cum  Alexander,  digito  ad  orientem  monstrans, 
"  Nonne  naves  procul  a  lltore  spectatis  }  "  inquit.  Et 
patruus  meus  "  Ita  est  "  inquit  ;  "  nam  illic  est  stati5 
tuta  navibus.  Sed  illae  naves,  ut  put5,  naves  iongae 
sunt  ex  classe  Britannica  ;    nam  pars  classis  nostrae 


Navis  Longa  Britannica. 


ORA   MAKITIMA  57 

nuiic  in  freto  Gallico  est.  Tum  ego  "euge,  optime! " 
inquam  ;  "  nfivem  longam  adhuc  non  spectavl.  Sed 
non  tam  grandcs  sunt  quam  putavi."  "Pergrandcs 
sunt,".inquit  patruus  meus  "  sed  procul  a  lltore  sunt ; 
omncs  laminls  ferrels,  nonnullae  arictibus  vel  turribus 
armatae  sunt." 

42.  Tum  nautam  veteranum  de  nominibus  navi- 
uin  longarflm  interrogavimus.  In  classe  Britannica 
militaverat,  sed  tum  mllitia  vacabat,  et  cuslds  crat  orae 
maritimae.  Nomina  navium,  ut  affirmabat,  erant 
Grandis,  Rcgdlis,  Magnifica,  Tonans,  A  rrogans,  Fcrox  ; 
omnibus  tcgimen  erat  laminls  ferrels  fabricatum.  In 
Grandi  praefectus  classis  nfivigabat.  Omnes  ad 
ancoram  deligatae  erant.  Tum  Ale.xander  "  Cur  n5n  " 
inquit  "  ad  naves  in  scapha  navigamus?"  Mihi  et 
Marco  propositum  pergrfitum  erat  ;  et  nauta  ad 
navigandum  paratus  erat.  Itaque  patruus  mcus  "  Ser5 
domum  adventabimus"  inquit ;  "  sed  sl  vos  puerl 
cupidl  cstis  navem  longam  spectandl,  ego  n5n  deneg- 
ab5."  Tum  nauta  "  Exspectate"  inquit  "dum  omnia 
par5  "  ;  et  vcla  rem5sc]ue  in  scapham  portavit.  Ouam 
dulce  erat  in  marl  tranquill5  navigare!  Ventus  lenis 
flabat,  et  brevl  tcmpore  ad  Rcgdlcni  appropinquavimus. 
Tum  ciassiaril  n5bls  navem  ingentem  monstraverunt 
cum  machinls,  tormcntls,  rostrls,  ccterls. 

43.  H5ra  iam  decima  erat  cum  a  Rcgdll  wos  in 
scapham  dedimus.  Tum  ad  lltus  remigare  necesse 
erat ;  nam  ventus  adversus  erat.  Kgo  et  Marcus  una 
cum  patru5  mc5  et  nauta  vcteran5  rcmis  lab^rfnimus. 


58  ORA    MARITIMA 

Sed  nbn  ante  undecimam  horam  m  lltore  stetimus, 
Dum  domum  properamus,  imber  fuit,  et  neqesse  erat 
in  tabcrna  aliquantum  temporis  exspectare  :  intrav- 
imus  et  nos  recreavimus  ;  nam  fatlgatl  eramus.  Sed 
'  post  tenebrils  lux.'  Cum  domum  adventavimus,  amita 
mea  et  Lydia  "  Ubi  tam  diu  fuistis?"  inquiunt  ;  "  nos 
anxiae  fuimus  ;  sed  cena  iam  parata  est."  Tum  nos 
"Multa  spectavimus  "  inquimus  ;  "  ambuliitio  longa 
sed  pcrgrata  et  utilis  fuit."  Post  ccnam  Marcus  ct 
Alexander  Dubras  in  vehiculo  properaverunt.  Ego 
per  noctem  de  Britannls  antlquls  et  de  classe  Britan- 
nicahodierna  somniavl.  Ante  oculos  erant  virl  fortes 
membrls  robustls,  flavls  capillls,  oculls  caerulels  cum 
Romanls  terra  marlque  pugnantes. 


DULCE   DOMUM. 


Deus  Salvam  Fac  Reginam, 
Matre.m  P^atriae. 


PREPARATIONS 

NOTE   TO  TIIE   TeACHER  ON  THE    PrONU  NCIATION    OF  WOUDS.       If   the 

last  syllable  but  one  of  a  worJ  of  more  than  Iwo  syllables  is  lons;;  it  is  also 
iiccented  :  'd  short,  the  atcent  is  ihrown  back  on  to  the  last  syllable  but  Iwo, 
But  words  of  ortly  Iwo  syllables  are  always  accented  on  the  first  of  the  Iwo. 

Syllables  closed  by  two  or  more  consonants  are  moslly  long,  as  in  viLLa, 
luSCima,  iNTeRDiiin,  paKTeni,  uMBRa,  feneSTRa ;  so  too  are  sylibles 
containing  a  double  vowel,  as  in  iiAUtAE.  But  many  syllables  ending  in  a 
single  consonant  and  containing  a  single  vowel  are  also  long,  because  the  vowel 
is  itself  a  long  vowel :  these  vo\»els  are  marked  in  the  lext  and  vocabuiaries 
of  this  book.  Thus  beala  and  aiUiiiia  have  ihe  middle  syllable  long,  and  are 
Iherefore  marked  beata,  antyqna  :  and  it  is  because  the  middle  syllable  in  each 
of  these  words  has  a  long  vowel  in  it  ihat  it  is  accenied  [bedta,  anttqiia). 
Vowcls  which  do  not  bear  any  mark  niay  bc  regarded  as  short,  as  in  doiiiiiia, 
aiiiita,  casa,  quoijite,  tiica,  tita  (accented  doinina,  dinita,  cdsa,  qnoque,  tnc'a, 
tiia). 

In  the  Drill  Exercises  and  Appendices  (pp.  101-144)  the  quantities  of  the 
long  vo-.vels  are  not  marked,  except  lor  some  special  reason  (e.g.  in  order  to 
dislinguish  the  ablative  singular  of  the  xst  declension  from  ihe  nominalive 
singular).  These  pages  will  provide  an  opportunity  of  testing  how  far  ihe  ear 
of  the  pupil  has  been  trained  by  the  sludy  of  the  text. 


6o 


PREPARATIONS 


L   The  Sea  Coast. 


[English   w<jrds  connected  with  the 
translations  of  them,  are  given  in  square 

§1. 


Latin  by  origin,  but  not  intended  ac         I 
brackets  and  Roman  type.] 


quam  bella 

hoiv  beautifiil 

viUae 

of  the  country-house 

est 

is 

area 

an  open  space  [area] 

ora  maritima 

L  the  sea-shore 

in  area 

in  the  open  space 

non  procul 

not/ar 

castanea 

a  chestnut-tree 

ab  ora  marit 

ubi 

where 

ima 

from  the  sea-shore 

luscinia 

a  nightingaie 

villa 

a  countrv-house 

interdum 

sometimes 

[villa] 

cantat 

sings 

in  villa 

in  the  country-house 

sub  umbra 

uhder  the  shade 

amita  mea 

my  aunt 

(umbra,  shade ; 

habitat 

dweils,  lives 

cf.  '  umbrella ') 

et 

atid 

castaneae 

of  ihe  chestnut-tree 

ego  habito 

I  divell,  I  am 

ancilla 

a  maid-servant 

staying 

cenam  ^axai prepares  supper 

cuni  amita  raea  ^vith  viy  aunt 

amo  oram 

I  love  the  shore 

nunc 

now 

amo  villam  /  love  t/ie  pretty 

ante  ianuam 

before  the  door 

bellam 

country-house 

Compare  the  different  forms  of  the  same  word  (Singular 
Number)  in  the  foUowing  sentences  : 

Villa  bella  est.  There  is  a  pretty  country  house,  or  T/ie  countfj- 
house  is  pretty. 

Villam  bellam  amO.     I  love  the  pretty  country-Iwuse. 

lanua  villae  bellae  est  aperta.  Tfu  door  of  the  pretty  country- 
house  is  open. 

In  villa  bella  habitu.     /  am  staying  in  the  pretty  country  house. 

NoTE.  ego  habito,  1  am  staying  (where  the  word  /  has  some 
strcsb) ;  amo,  /  love  (whcre  the  word  /  has  no  stress.) 


PREPARATIONS 


6l 


§2. 

feriae 
sunt 

feriae  nunc  sunt 

inter  ferias 

in  villa  maritima 

6  beatas  ferias ! 

in  arena 

orae  marilimae 

ancorae 

et 

catenae 

nam 


holidays 
are  or  there 

are 
it  is  now  ihe 

holidays 
during  t/ie 

holidays 
in  the  country- 

house  by 

the  sea 
oh,  the  happy 

holidays  1 
on  the  sand 
ofthe  sea  coast 
anchors 
and 
chains 
for 


incolae 
nautae 
magna  est 

audacia 

nautarum 
procellas  formi- 
dant 

nautas  anio 
ut 

nautae 
me  amant 
cum  naulis 
in  scaphis 

navigo 


the  inhabitants 
sailors 
great  is  (or  is 

great) 
the  courage 
of  sailors 

they  fear 

storms 
I  like  sailors 
as 

sailors 
like  me 

with  the  sailors 
ifi  boais 

[skiffs] 
I  sail  [navi- 

gate] 


Compare  the  forms  of  the  Plural  '  nautae,'  sailors,  in  the  above 
senlences  :  nautae  me  amant,  sailors  lihe  iiic ;  nautas  amo,  I like 
sailors ;  audacia  nautarum,  the  courage  of  sailors ;  cum  nautis, 
with  sailors.  Note  that  the  ending  -ae,  like  the  EngUsh  -s,  has 
two  diffcrent  meanings :  nautae  =  (i)  sailor^s,  (2)  sailors. 

Compare  the  different  forms  of  the  same  word  (Plural  Num- 
ber)  in  the  following  sentences : 

Villae   bellae   sunt.     There  are  pretty  country-houses,  or  Tli 
country-houses  are  pretty. 

Villas  bellas  amo.     I love pretty  countryhouses. 

lanuae  villarum  bellarum  sunt  apertae.      The  doors  of  the  pretty 

couulry-hoiises  are  opcn. 

In  villis  btrllis  habitant.      Thcy  dwell  in  pretty  country-houses. 


62 

§3. 

ex  fenestris 

undas  spectas 
caeruleas 


PREPARATIONS 


otit  oj  ipxfrom) 
the  windows 
thou  seest  (you 
see)  the  waves 
blue 

quam  magnae  sunt  hoiv  big  they 
are  (i.e.  the 


waves,  und- 

ae) 

per-lucidae 

transparent 

[lucid] 

post  cenam 

a/ter  stipper 

lunam  specto 

I  see  the  moon 

stellas 

the  stars 

ex  fenestra  mea 

from  my  win- 

dow 

prope  villam 

near  the  coun- 

try-house 

silva 

a  wood 

saepe 

often 

ambulo 

I  walk 

Quantopere 

hoiv  7nuch 

nos  delectat 
6  copiam 

plantarum 
herbarum 

bacarum 
non  solum 
sed  etiam 
agricolae 
circum 
habitant 
casae 

agricolarum 
parvae 
casas  albas 
habitant 

casas  visitat 


delights  us 

oh  the    abund- 

ance 
ofplants 
of  grasses,  of 

herbs 
of  berries 
notonly  [solely] 
but  also 
farmers 
around 
dzvell 
the  cottages 
of  the  farmers 
small 

inhabit  white 

cottages 
visits  the 

cotta^es 


Compare  the  Singular  and  Phiral  forms  of  the  word  'amita' 
in  the  following  sentences  : 

Amita  niea  casas  visitat.     Aly  aunt  visits  cottages. 

Amitae  meae  casas  visitant.     My  aunts  visit  cottagcs. 
Amitam  meani  amo.     I  love  my  aunt. 

Amitas  meas  amo.     I love  my  aunts. 
Amitae  meae  villa  est  bella.     Afy  aunfs  country-house  is  pretty. 

Amiiarum    mearum    villae   sunt    bellae.      My    aunts' 
country-houses  are  pretty. 
Cum  amua  mca  ambulo.     I  tvalk  with  my  aunt. 

Cum  amilis  mois  anibulo.     1 7valk  ivith  my  aunts. 


PREPARATIONS 


63 


Notice  that  the  forms  in  -am  (Singular)  and  -as  (Plural)  occur 

(i)  after  certain  Prepositions  : 

ante  ianuam,  beforc  thc  door  ;  post  cenam,  after  suppcr ; 
prope  villam,  near  the  hoiise ;  inter  feiias,  durmg  the  holidays. 

(2)  without  any  Preposition,  to  complete  the  sense  with  certain 
Verbs.  The  form  in  -am  or  -as  is  then  called  the  Object  of  the 
Verb,  In  the  following  sentences  it  will  be  seen  that  the  forms 
in  -am  and  -as  differ  in  meaning  from  those  in  -a  and  -ae  just 
as  vie  diflfers  from  /  (or  '  /«';//,'  '  them,'  '  7ahom,'  from  '  he,' 
*they,'  'who')  in  English  : — 


/ 

love 

sailoi 

s. 

Ego 

amo 

nautas. 

Sai/ors 

love 

me. 

Nautae 

aman 

t 

me. 

The  maid 

servant     prepares 

suppcr. 

Ancilla 

parat 

cenam. 

Sailors 

inhabit 

whitc 

cottas;es. 

Nautae 

habitant 

casas  albas. 

§4. 

regina  mea 

my  queen 

undarum 

of  the  7mves 

magna 

great 

triumplio 

I  triumpJi,  I 

gloria 

the  glory 

exult 

Vicloriae  Reglnae  of  Queeti  Vic- 

te  amo 

I  love  tJiee 

toria  (or  Queen 

Britannia 

0  Britain 

yiJoria's) 

vos 

you 

in  insulis  Brit- 

insulae  B 

itann- 

annicls 

in  the  British 

icae 

0  British  is/es 

islands 

non  cst 

is  not 

coloniae   Britann 

patria 

native-Iand 

icae 

BritisJi  colonies 

ex  Africa 

domina 

mistrcss 

Meridiana 

from  SoutJi 

[dame] 

Africa 

multarum  terrarum  of  many  lands 

sum 

I  am 

Note  that  the  forms  in  -a  (Singular)  and  -ae  (Plural)  may 
be  used  in  speaking  to  persons  or  tliings  .  in  such  cases  we  may 
translate  by  using  the  word  'o'  in  EngHsh,  but  generally  it  is 
bctter  to  leave  out  this  word  :  te,  Britannia,  anio,  /  love  thee, 
Britai/i  :  vOs,  insulae  Biitannicae,  amo,  J  leve you,  BritisJi  islcs. 


64 


PREPARATIONS 


§5. 


quoque 

foo,  aho 

operani  das 

givest  (gtve) 

consobrina 

cousin 

attention 

apud  amitam 

(  =  study) 

meam 

at  the  Jiouse  of 

ego  operam  do 

I  glve  atten- 

my  aunt 

tion 

columbas  curat 

keeps  doves 

linguis  antiquis 

to  tJie  ancieni 

cura 

the  care 

ianguages 

columbarum 

of  doves 

Romae 

of  Rome 

LyJiae 

io  Lydia 

Graeciae 

of  Greece 

laetitiam  dat 

gives  delight 

cum  Lydia 

see  §  I :  cum 

tii,  Lydia 

thou  iyou), 
Lydia 

amita  mea 

ad  siivam 

to  ihe  tvood 

cum 

when 

vel 

or 

es 

thou  art. 

navigamus 

we  sail 

you  are 

undae  delectant 

the  ivaves  de- 

apud  magistram 

light 

tuam 

at  the  house  of 

vos,  filiae,  amatisjw/,  o  daugh- 

thy  iyouf) 

ters,  love 

schoolmisti-ess 

vos  amat 

loves  you 

linguae  Franco- 
gallicae 

to  the  French 

ubi  .  .  .  ibi 

where  .  .  there 

language 

inopia 

want,  poverty 

Anglicae 

to  the  English 

levat 

relieves 

I 


Compare  carefuUy  : 

Ly diae  laetitiam  dat,  gives  pleasure  tO  Lydia. 

ad  Silvam  ambulr>,  I  wa/k  tO  the  wood. 

The  forms  in  -ae  (Singular)  and  -is  (Plural)  meaning  *to'  are 
often  found  wiih  verbs  of  '  giving ' ;  hence  they  are  called  the 
'  Dative  Case'  (Case  of  Giving).  But  they  are  notused  with  verbs 
of^going')  wiih  these  verbs  'to'  \s  expresscd  by  the  Preposition 
'  ad '  foUowed  by  a  form  in  -am  (Singular)  or  -as  (Plural). 


PREPARATIO.NS 


65 


First  Declension, 


Name  of  Case. 


Ist   Case. 

l.ulia 

Lydia 

Noniinative 

2nd  Case. 

Lvdia 

0  Lvdia 

"Vocative. 

3rd  Case. 

Lvdiam 

Lydia 

Accusative. 

4th   Case. 

Lvdiae 

Lydias,  of  Lydia 

Genitive. 

5th  Case. 

Lvdiae 

io  Lydia 

Dative. 

6th   Case. 

cum  Lvdia 

■vith  Lydia 

Ablative, 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1 

2 
3 
4 
5 

6 

villa  bella 
villa  bella 
villam  bellam 
villae  bellao 
villae  bellae  {with  a  vcrb 
cfgiviiif) 

in  villS  bella 

vi?lae  bellae 
villae  bellae 
villas  bellas 
villariim  bellarum 
villis  bellls  {'a<ith  a  verb  of 
'givittg') 
in  villis  bellls 

^^The  Preposition  which  is  uscd  with  the  Ablative  Case 
must  be  varied  to  suit  the  sense  of  the  noun  which  is  being 
dechned  :  e.g.  'cum  Lydia/  but  '  in  villa '  or  'ex  villa'  or  *a  villa.' 


Present  Tense  of  'sum'  and  Ist  Conjug-ation. 


ISt     rERSON 

2nd  Pkrson 
3rd  Person 


ist  Person 
2nd  Person 
3rd  Person 


SINGULAR. 
snm,  /  am 

63,  thoH  art  {yon  are) 
est,  he  (she,  it)  is 


spectO,  J  see 

apectSs,  thou  ieest  {you  see) 

spectat,  he  (she,  it)  sees 


PLURAL. 
snmns,  we  are 
estis,  you  are 
6unt,  they  are 


spectamus,  we  see 
spectitis,  you  see 
spectant,  they  see 


The  verb  'do,'  L give,  has  a  short  a  in  the  ist  and  2nd  pcrson 
pUiral  :   damus,  datis. 


66 


PREPARATIONS 


II.  My  Uncle. 

§  0.  SS"  In  this  and  ihe  foUowing  Preparations  the  nouns  of  the  ist  Decl. 
will  be  given  in  the  Nom.  Sing. ,  except  when  a  whole  phrase  is  quoted. 


patruus  meus 

my  tincle 

prope  hortum 

near  the  gar- 

quondam 

once,  formerly 

den 

praefectus 

an  officer 

unde 

w/ience,  from 

erat 

7t'as 

which 

militia*  vacat 

he  is  free  (i.e. 

aqua 

water 

he  has 

retired)  from 

portamus 

7ve  fetch,  we 

mi/itary  service 

carry 

agello  suo 

to  his  farm 

hortum  irrigamus  we  waier 

agellus 

the  farm  or 
estate 

[irrigate]  tht 
garden 

patrui  mei 

of  my  iincle 

in  horto 

in  the  garden 

magnus 

large 

nunicrus 

nitmber 

circum  viU 

ani 

around  t/ie 

ros.i 

a  rose 

villa 

viola 

a  violet 

hortus 

a  garden 

tibi 

to  t/iee,  to  you 

murus 

a  'iVall 

mi  patrue 

0  ?ny  unc/e 

horti 

of  the  gardcn 

cum  patruo  meo 

7vith  my  unc/e 

altus 

high 

ambulas 

i/iou  wa//iest. 

rivus 

a  stream  - 
[river] 

you  wa/k 

*Note  the 

Ablat 

ve  without  a  Preposition,  here  meaning  '  froni.' 

Second  Declensior 

. 

NOUNS    AND    AdJECTIVES    IN    -US. 

SINGULAR    NUMBER. 

1 

hortus  bellus,  a  pretty  garden 

2 

horte  belle,  o  pretty  gardeti 

3 

hortum  bellum,  a  pretty  garden 

4 

horti  belll,  of  a  pretty  garden 

5 

horto  bell5,  to  a  pretty  garden  (with  a 
verb  of  '  giving  ') 

6 

in  horto  bello,  in  a  pretty  garden 

PREPARATIONS 


67 


§7. 

angulus 

ulmi 

in  ulmis 

corvi 

nidificant 

corvos  specto 

libenter 


angle^  corncr 

elms 

in  the  elms 

crozvs 

make  nests 

I  watch  the 

crows 
gladly 


circum  nidos  suos  round  their 

7iests 
volitant  tliey  Jiy 

cor  vo  ru  m  of  crows 

multi  mergi  many  sea-gt!i/s 

super  oceanum       over  the  ocean 
mergi  0  sea-guiis 

volitatis  yoii  fiy 

praeda  prey 

captatis  you  catch 

oceanus  tJie  ocean 


mergis 

cibum  dat 

agellus  suus 

equi 

vacca 

porci 

galli  gallinae- 

gallos  ciirat 

vicus 

rusticl 


nonnuiii    ex 
rusticis 

cum  e(juls 


to  sea  gulis 
gives  food 
iiis  estate 
iiorses 
cozu 

pigs  [pork] 
que  cochs  and  hens 
minds  t/ie  cocks 
a  viiiage 
tiie   country- 
/oik,    tiie 
rustics 

some  of{put  of) 

the  rustics 
7vith  {togetJier 

witJi)  tJie 

Jiorses 


Note  in  the  above  : — 1.  corvl  nldificant,  crotvs  maJie  nests. 
2.  vos,  corvl,  you,  0  croivs.  3.  corvos  specto,  1  watch  crows. 
4.  namerus  corvorum,  a  7iumber  o/  croivs.  5.  corvls  dat,  gives 
io  crows.     G.  cum  corvls,  ivith  c7-ozvs. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1 

2 
3 

4 
5 

6 

hortus  bellus 
horte  belle 
hortum  bellum 
horti  belli 

horto  bella  (with  a  verb 
of 't^iving') 
iu  horto  bellS 

horti  belli 
liorti  bslli 
hortos  belloa 
hortorura  bcllorum 
horlij  belils  (with  a  verb  of 
'  giving  ■) 
in  hortij  bellia 

68 


rKKPARATIONS 


§  8.    /tS"  In  this  and  Ihe  following 
in  -tis  wili  be  given  in  the  Nom.  Sing. 


1'reparations  the  nouns  of  the  2n(l  Decl. 
,  except  when  a  whole  phrase  is  quoled. 


sropiihis  albus 

a  7vkife  diff 

spcctare 

to  see 

ab-est 

is  distant 

(undae)  tran- 

cahn,    tranqiiil 

noctu 

by  night,  in  the 

quillae 

{ivaves) 

tiight  time 

havaris 

you  wash  [lave] 

pharus 

lighthouse 

delectatis 

you  delight 

velut 

as,  even  as 

(undae)  turbu- 

stella  clara 

a  bright  star 

lentae 

rough,  turbu- 

in  5cean6 

on  the  ocean 

lent  {waves) 

illustrat 

lights  iip 

spuinatis 

you  foani    —^ 

[ilkistrates] 

murmuratis 

you  viurniur    - 

IIL  Ancicnt  Monuments. 

§  9-  ^^"  In  this  and  ihe  following  Preparations  the  verbs  of  ihe  ist 
Conjugation,  Present  Ten~e,  will  be  givcn  in  the  ist  Pcrson  Sing.,  except 
where  a  whole  phrase  is  qaoted. 


in  Cantio 

/;/  Kent 

m.uUos  r.ummos 

many  coins 

inter 

betiveen 

(nummos)  aureoj 

golden  {coins) 

Dubrae 

JDover 

(nummos)  argen 

(coins)  made  of 

Rutupiae 

Richborough 

teos 

silver 

situs 

situated  — 

(nummos)  aeneos  made  of  coppcr 

opl^ida  antlqua 

aficient  towns 

et    .    .    .    et 

both  .  .  .   and 

nmka  monumenta  many  monti- 

Britannus 

a  Briton 

ments 

occulto 

Ihide 

vestlgia 

vestiges,  traces 

causa 

a  cause,  source 

Romanus 

a  Roman 

lucri 

of  gain  [hicre] 

rehquiae 

relics 

aro 

I  plough 

oppidorum 

of  towns 

fundamenta 

thefoundations 

amphithealrorum 

of  amphi- 

aedificiorum 

of  buildings 

theatres 

[edifices] 

hodie 

to-day,  at  the 

excavo 

/  excavate 

present  day 

magno  pretio* 

at  a  grcat  price 

ex-sto 

lexist,  remain 

venum-do 

I  offerfor  sale 

via 

a  road 

patruo  mco  est 

my  uncle  has ; 

Londinium 

London 

lileraily  to    my  uncle 

solum 

soil 

there  is 

*Note  the  Ablative  without  a  rrcposition,  here  meaning  'at,' 
(an  expression  of   '  price  '  or  '  value '). 


PKErARATIONS 


69 


Note  the  words  Dubrae,  Dover ;  Rutiipiae,  Richboroitgh ; 
rcliquiae,  relics.  These  words  are  Plural  in  form  and  have  no 
Siiigular.  The  first  two  are  Singu'ar  in  mcaning,  hke  the  English 
'Alhenj'  (Lalin  'Alhena^');  the  third  is  Plural  in  meaning. 


Second  Declension— r.?;//'//»/^^. 

NOUNS     AND     AdJECTIVES     IN     -UM. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1,  2,  3 
4 
5 

« 

oppidum,  a  town,  0  town 
oppidi,  of  a  to-vn 
oppido,  to  a  town  (with  a 
verb  of  '  giving  ') 
in  oppido,  in  a  io-am 

oppila,  to-ifns,  0  towns 
oppidorum,  of  towns 
oppidis,  to  toivns  (with  a 
verb  of  '  giving ') 
in  oppidis,  in  towns 

Similarly  with  an  adjective  :   oppidum  antlquum,  an  ancient  town. 


§  10-  t3'  In  this  and  the  foUowing  Preparations  the  nouns  of  the  2nd 
Declension  in  -um  will  be  given  in  the  Nom.  Sing.,  e.xcept  when  a  whole 
phrase  is  quoted. 


conimentarii 

dc  vita  mea 
scriptito 


super  oppidum 
castellum 
specula 
murl  lati 


notes^  com- 

tnentaries 
al  out  my  life 
1 7vrite,  jot 
down 
[scribble] 
above  the  town 
fort  [castle] 
a  watch  tower 
broad  walls 


aedificium  con-    a  ronsecrated 
secratimi  building 

iam  already 

secundo  saeculo*  /;/  the  second 
century 

post  Christum 
naium 


afler  the  birth 
ofChrisl{\\\.. 
after    Christ 
born) 
ba^iiHc.x  Christ-     c.  Christian 
iana  basilica  (or 

church^ 

*Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Prcposition,  here  meaning  'in' 
(an  expression  of  '  time  whcn  'V 


70 


PREPARATIONS 


§11. 

promunturium 

sto 

post  castellum 

ClTvus  gramineus 

fretum  Gallicum 


oculus 
velum  album 


§12. 

delectamentum 

puerorum 
amicus 
dud  puerl 
Marcus 
puer 

quattuor-decim 
annus 

quattuordecim 
annorum 


a  pro)Hontor}\ 
headland 

I  stand 

behind  the 
castle 

a  grassy  JiUl 
or  doivn 

the  English 
(lit.  ^Ganic) 
C/tciHfiel 

an  eye 

a  white  sail 


navigium  Ger- 

manicum 
navigium  Belgi- 

cum 
ndnnuUa  (r;avi- 

gia) 
ex  navigiis 
sunt  nominata 
"  casiella  "       i.e 
littcra  C 
in  signo 
in  (with  Acc.) 


a  Gernian 

vessel 
a  Belgian 

vessel 
some  (^vessels) 

of  the  vessels 
are  nanied 
,  Cast/e  Lineri 
t/ie  /elter  C 
on  t/ie  flag 
to 


IV.  Boys'  Amusements. 


amuse/nent 
[delight] 
of  boys 
friend 
two  boys 
Mark 
a  boy 
four-teen 
year 


offourteen 
years,  i.e.  fourteen 
years  old 
mihi  io  me 

praecipuus  ckief  especia/, 

particu/ar 
Caledonia  Scot/and 

(puerl)  oriundi        {boys)  sprung 
nobis  puerls  sunt    to  us  boys  t/iere 
are  ( =  \ve  boys  have  ; 
cf.  patruo  meo  est,  §9) 
♦  Note   the   Ablative   without 
'from  ' ;  cf.  militia  vacat.  §  6 


condiscipulus 
hber  scholis* 

amicitia 

una 

unda  spumifera 

nato 

nimis 

(undae)  asperae 

nos  pueros 

ludus 

pila 

ut 

iuvat 

aedificare 

contra  undas 


schoo/fe//ow 
freefrom 

/essoHS 
friends/iip 
toget/ier 
a  foamy  'wavc 
I  swim,  bat/u 
too 

roug/i  (waves] 
us  boys 
game 
ba//  [pill] 
how 

it  de/ig/its 
to  bui/d 
against  t/ie 

waves 


For   the   forms    in  -are   see 
§  8  :  spectare,  to  see. 

a    Prepositi®n,   here    nieaning 


PREPARATIONS 


7» 


§13- 


plenae  gaudiorum  full  o/joys 
a  mane                    /ro»i  morn 
usque  ad  vesperum  rightontill eve 

[vespers] 
nunnumquam          sometimes  (lit. 

plerumque 

remigo 
do 

mostlv,  gencr- 

aliy 
I  row 
I  set   (cf.    §5, 

give) 

Petrus 
adulescentulus 

not  never) 
Peter 
a  young  man 

ventus  asper 

guberno 

ministro 

a  roiigh  tvind 
Isteer  [govern] 
/  altend 

vlgmtl 
remus  * 
(scapha)  apta 

twenty 
oar 

(a  boat)  /itted, 
adapted 

laudo 

[minister] 
I  praise 

♦  Note  the 

Dative  meaning  ' 

for '  {xtm\s,  /or 

oars). 

Second  Declension— (r^///'//«<'<;v/. 

NOUNS     AND     ADJECTIVES     LIKE     'PUER* 

{Le.,  without  the  ending  -us  or  -um  in  the  Nom.  Sing.) 


S/NGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

puer,  a  boy 
puer,  0  hoy 
puerum,  a  boy 
puerl,  a  boy's 
puerO,  to  a  boy 
cum  puerS,  with  a  boy 

pueii,  boys 
pueri,  0  boys 
pueros,  hoys 
puerorum,  boys" 
pueiis,  to  hoys 
cum  pueris,  with  boys 

There  are  not  many  nouns  declined  Hke  '  puer.'  Vesper, 
evening  or  evening  star,  is  Uke  it  for  the  most  part,  but  has  no 
Plural.  There  are,  however,  a  few  adjectives  (not  many)  dechned 
like  'puer'  in  both  Singular  and  Plural,  for  instance  :  \\htr  /ree ; 
miser,  unhappy,  miserable  ;  asper,  rough  ;  spumifer,  y6'fl//y,  /oam- 
bearing  and  other  words  compounded  of  fer,  bearing). 


72 


PREPARATIONS 


§  14-  i^  In  tliis  and  the  following  rreparations  the  nouns  of  the  2nJ 
Declension  Uke  fucr  will  be  given  in  the  Nom.  Sing.,  except  whcn  a  whole 
phrase  is  quoled. 


conimemoralus 

Leir 
regulus 


locus  p/ace 

fabula  p/fiy,  dratna, 

[fable] 
vientioned 
[commemorated] 
Lear 

ruier,  petty 
king 
fortuna  misera         unhappy  fate 

[miserable  fortune] 
deploro  /  deplore, 

ia?nent 
stullitia  foiiy 

culpo  I  biatne 

animus  ingratus      ijigratitude 

(lit.   an  Ufigrateful 
tnind) 
accuso  •  /  accuse 

fortijna  aspera        harshfate 
filiae  impiae  unnaturai 

[impious]  daughters 


constantia 
ex  [loeta 
nominatus 


vir  generosiis 

amicus  fldus 

de  scopulo 

se  praccipitare 

paro 

filius  suus 
virum  servat 

perlculum 


constancy 
named  after 
{/?-om)  the 
poet; 
c.  Shakspere^ s  cli^ 
a  ma?i  of  nobie 
birth,  a  nobieman 
[generoiis] 
a  fait/iful 

friend 
doivn  f?-om  the 

ciiff 
to  huri  hiinseij 
[precipilate] 
I prepa?-e 
his  ow?i  son 
saves  the  ??ia?i 

[preserves] 
peril,  da?tger 


Vir. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

vir,  a  man 
vir,  0  mait 
virum,  a  man 
viri,  a  man^s 
virO,  to  a  man 
cum  viro,  with  a  man 

viri,  tnen 
viri,  0  men 
viroa,  men 
virOrum,  mfn^i 
viria,  to  men 
cum  viris,  ^vith  men 

There  is  no  other  word  in  Lalin  e.xactly  hke  '  vir';  but  'Leir' 
is  declined  in  the  same  way  in  some  Laiin  Histories  of  the 
TJritons. 


PREPARATIONS 


73 


§15- 

magister  nostei 


V.    Our   Schoolmaster. 


vir  doctus 
peritus  ludorum 


our  school- 
?naster,  teacher 
a  learned  man 
skilled  hi  (lit. 
of)  games 
carus  (with  Dat.)   dcar  {to) 
dextra  right-hand 

magistrl  nostrl        our  school- 
masters 
(dextra)  valida        (a)  strong 

{right  hand) 
lazy  boys 
neither  .  .  nor 
love  the  tnaster 
0  Sabidius 
(see  note  below) 
possum  I  can,  I  am 

ahle 
dicere  (^rd  Conj.)  {to)  say 


puen  pign 
nec   .    .    .    nec 
magistrum  amant 
Sabidl 


quare 

hoc  tantum 
quia 

Ubros  amant 
(hbros)  Graecos 
(Ubros)  Latlnos 
discipulus 
scholae  nostrae 
atque 

scientiae  raathe- 
maticae 


why 
this  only 
because 

they  love  hooks 
Gj-eek  {books) 
Latin  {books) 
pupil  [disciple] 
of  our  school 
and  also 


magistro  nosiro 
Hbrorum  pulchr- 

orum 
schola  nostra 
(schola)  clara 


to  our  master 


offine  books 
our  school 
(rt)  famous 
{school) 
hbrls  to  books 

in  vlco  nostro       in  our  vilhige 
ludus  hlterarius    an  elementary 
school  (litterarius  =  where 
pupils    are    taught    '  lit- 
terae,'  cf.  §  1 1).    'Schohi' 
means  a  more  advanced 
kind  of  school 
creber  puerls*      croivded {filled) 
et  pueUls  with  boys  and 

,(;ir/s 
(creber)  hberls     zvith  childrcn 
(Plural   of   the    adjective 
hber,  free :  h'terally  free 
ones,    i.e.    children    of 
free-born  parents) 
cum  Alexandro    withA/exander 
(cum)  amlcls 
mels 


ad  Ventam  Del 
arum 


{wit/i)  my 
friends 
at  (or  near) 
lP'inc/iester 
(Vcnta  of  ihe  Belgae 
in  Hampshire) 


mat/iematica/ 
sciences 

The  lines  quoted  abovc  (from  the  poet  Martial,  about  a  Roman 
called  Sabidius)  are  the  original  of  the  following  English  verses: 
I  do  not  like  you.  Dr.  Fell ; 
The  reason  why  I  cannot  tell. 
r>ut  this  one  thing  I  know  fuU  well, 
I  do  not  like  you,  Dr.  Fell. 
*Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition,  here  meaning  '  with.' 


74  PREPARATIONS 

Second  Heelension—contiftued. 

NOUNS    AND    Adjectives    like    '  magister.' 


S/NGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

magister,  a  master 
magister,  o  master 
magistrum,  a  master 
magistri,  a  master's 
magistrS,  io  a  master 
cum  magistro,  with  a  master 

magistrl,  masters 
magistrl,  o  masters 
magistros,  masters 
magistrSrum,  masters' 
magistris,  to  masters 
cum  magistris,  with  masters 

Most  nouns  and  adjectives  of  the  2nd  Declension  in  er  are 
declined  like  '  magister ' :  liber,  book  ;  Alexander,  Alexander ; 
noster,  oiir ;  piger,  lazy  ;  creber,  crowded ;  and  many  others. 

These  words  differ  from  '  puer '  only  in  dropping  the  e  in  all  the 
Cases  except  the  Nominative  and  the  Vocative. 


Uses  of  the  Forms  of  Adjectives. 

It  will  have  been  seen  that  the  form  of  ilie  adjective  depends 
on  the  form  of  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs.     Thus  we  have  had: 

magnz^i'  numer«j,  §  7  magnfl  audaci^,  §  2     magnww  castell«w,  §10 

scopulwi'  alb/zj,  §  8  casa  alb^,  §3  \c\um  alb«w,  §  11 

numm?/j  antIqu?/5,  §9  specula  antiqua,  §10  oppidura  antiqu;////,  §9 

\)dXxViUS  me«5,  §6  amita  mea,  §  i 

vir  doctwi,  §  15 

liber  Latinwi',  §  15 

ventMi-  asper,  §  13  forti"ma  aspera,  §  14 

It    is    clear,    then,   that  there  are   many  more   forms   of  the 


PREPARATIONS 


75 


adjective  ihan  of  the  noiin  ;  for  each  of  the  above  adjectives  has 
three  forms  of  the  Nominative  Caser--^ 


(omitted  in  some  ad- 
jectives  hke  'asper') 

Similarly  we  may  arrange  nouns  in  three  classes : 

Nouns  which  take 

adjectivesin  us{ox 

those  like  'asper') 
numerus 
nummus 
patruus 
vir* 
liber* 
etc. 

*Note  that  in  these  cases  thc  ending  of  the  noun  is  not  the  same  as  that  of 
the  adjective  which  goes  with  it. 

To  these  three  classes  of  nouns  it  is  convenient  to  give  names, 
nouns  of  the  first  class  are  called  7nascii/ine,  those  of  the  second 
class  are  cMed  /efn/nine,  tliose  of  the  third  ckiss  are  called  ncu/er. 
And  the  forms  of  the  adjective  taken  by  ihe  diffcrent  ckasses  of 
nouns  are  called  by  the  same  namcs. 

In  order  to  know  to  which  class  a  noun  belongs  (and  thcrcfore 
which  form  of  the  adjective  it  takes),  observe  the  Ibllowing  rulcs: — 

Nouns  of  the  Ist  Declension  are  feminine,  except  those  denoting 
male  persons,  which  are  mascuhne  :  thus  insi//a,  casa,  ora, 
amita,  are  feminine ;  agrico/a,  nauta,  pocta,  inco/a,  are 
mascuhne. 

Nouns  of  the  2nd  Declension  ending  in  us  or  r  are  masculine  : 
e.g.  numerus,  scopu/us,  patruus,  /iber,  vir.  Some  exceptions 
will  be  found  later. 


Nouns  which  take 

Nouns  which  take 

adjeclives  in  -a 

adjectives  in  -unt 

audacia 

castellum 

casa 

vjlum 

specula 

oppidum 

amita 

etc. 

fortuna 

etc. 

Nouns  of  the  2nd  Declension  ending  in  um  are  neuter. 


76 


PREPARATIONS 

Table  of  thf,  Forms  of  Adjectives. 


SJNGULAR 

PLURAL, 

masc. 

/em. 

neut. 

masc. 

/em. 

r.eui. 

1 

magnus 

magna 

magnum 

magni 

magnaa 

magna 

2 

magne 

magna 

magnum 

magni 

ma^nae 

magua 

3 

magnum 

magnam 

magnum 

magno3 

maguas 

magna 

4 

magni 

magnae 

magni 

magnorum 

magnarum 

magnorum 

5 
6 

magno 
magno 

magnae 
magna 

magnS 
magno 

1  magnis 

magnis 

magnis 

1,2 

asper 

aspera 

asperum 

asperi 

asperae 

aspera 

3 

asperum 

asperam 

asperum 

asperoi 

asperas 

aspera 

4 

asperi 

asperae 

aspen 

asperorum 

asperarum 

asperorum 

5 
6 

asperS 
aspero 

asperae 
aspera 

asperS 
asperd 

l  asperis 

asp  eris 

asperis 

1,2 

noster 

nostra 

nostrum 

nostri 

nostrae 

nostra 

3 

nostrum 

noBtram 

nostrum 

nostros 

nostrSs 

nostra 

4 

nostri 

nostrae 

nostri 

nostrorum 

nostrSrum 

nostrorum 

5 
6 

nostro 
nostro 

nostrae 
nostra 

nostro 
nostro 

1  nostris 

nostris 

nostris 

PrEPOSITIONS    HITHERTO    FOUND   WITH   THE    AbLATIVE. 


ab  ora  maritima,  §i. 

CUm  nauti's,  §2. 

de  vita,  §io;  de  scopulo,  §14. 

ex  fenestris,  §3. 


in  ( =  in) :  in  Africa,  §  6. 
{  =  on) :  in  arena,  §2. 
SUb  (  =  under) :  sub  umbra,  §  i. 


PrEPOSITIONS    HITHERTO    FOUND    WITH    THE    ACCUSATIVE. 

inter  fCnTis,  §2. 

post  ccnaui,  §3. 
prope  silvam,  §3. 
SUper  oceanum,  §  7. 


ad  silvam,  §  5. 

ante  ianuam,  §1. 

apud  amitam  meam,  §5. 

circum  villam,  §  6, 

in  ( =  into  or  to) :  in  Africam,  §11 


PREPARATIONS 


77 


VI.    Ancient   Britain. 


§i6. 


S.-^"  In  this  anJ  the  following  Preparalions  all  nouns  and  adjectives  of 
thc  ist  and  2nd  Deciensions  will  be  given  in  the  Nom.  Sing.,  except  when  a 
whole  phrase  is  qiioted. 


hisloricus,  a,  um 

historical 

silva  Anderida 

tJie  Andreds- 

siudiosus,  a,  um 

fond,  siudiotis 

weaid 

narro 

Itell,I  fiarraie 

{weaid={Q)X&%i) 

proximus,  a,  um 

nearest 

vastus,  a,  um 

wiid,  waste 

proximo  anno* 

last  year 

[vast] 

dum 

ivJiile 

incu'tus,  a,  uin 

uncuitivafed 

crat 

tvas  {he  2vas) 

fera 

zviid  heast 

narrabat 

he  used  fo  ieil 

lupus 

woif 

or  fiarrafe 

Utsus 

bear 

auscultabnnt 

{fhey)  used  fo 

ccrvus 

sta^ 

iisfen 

ai)er  + 

wiid  boar 

ad-cram 

I  used  to  be 

mullus,  a,  un 

niuch 

present 

varius,  a,  um 

varied 

sic 

SJ,  thus,  as 

matcria 

timber 

foiiows 

[tiiaterial] 

fere 

aiinost 

fagus  (fcin.) 

beech 

totus,  a,  um 

wJ:o!e  [total] 

K^Most 

nouns  denoting 

tola  Llritannia 

tJie  zvhoie  of 

trees  are  f 

cminine 

Britain 

notus,  a,  um 

knoivn 

The 

adj.  totus.a,  um 

si 

\f 

is    irregular    in    the 

Gaius  Itihiis 

i.e.  Caesar 

Gen. 

and  Dat.  Sing. 

verus,  a,  um 

true 

densus,  a,  um 

dense,  tJiicJi 

vera  (neut.  pl.) 

true  tJiings,  tJie 

fluvius 

river 

trufh 

Tatncsa  t 

TJuimes 

afifirmo 

lajfrm,!  sfafe 

ager+ 

ficid 

pTnus  (fem.) 

fine 

frQgifcr,  frugifera 

fruifful 

Scoticus,  a,  um 

ScottisJi 

frugiferum 

[fruit-bcaring] 

de-crat 

was  wanting 

*Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition,  here  meaning  'in' 
(time  when),  cf.  §  lo  secundo  sacculo.     f  Tacitus  calls  the  river 
'Tatnesa;'  Caesar  calls  it  'Tamesis'  (^rd  Decl.). 
\  Declined  like  magister. 


78 


PREPARATIONS 


§17- 

liber,  llbcra,  liber- 
um  free 

With  Abl.;cf.  §6,  §12 

metallum  nietal 

multl,  ae,  a  many 

abundabat  abounded 

With  Abl. 
plumbum  album     white  lead 

i.e.  tin 
ferrum  iron 

atque  and  moreover 

Tacitus  Tacitus, 

a  Roman  historian 
Zold 


aurum 

argentum 

margarita 

ostrea 

dabat 

parvus,  a,  um 

praeclarus,  a,  um  famous 

caehmi  sky,  climate 

tum  quoque  then  too,  i.e. 

just  as  now 
creber,  crebra, 

crebrum  frequent 


silver 
pearl 
[Margaret] 
oyster 

gave,  yieldcd 
small 


pluvia*  rain 

nebula  cloud 

ater,  atra,  atrum  dark 
foedus,  a,  um       hideous 
prulna  frost 

ab-erant  were  absent 

natura  nature 

piger,  pigra,  pigr- 

um  sluggish 

testimonium  testimony 

nauta  Romanus   see  §15     (Rule 
of  Genders) 


inquit 
vix 

pot-erant 
-ne 

an 

satis 

impiger,  impigra, 
impigrum 


says  he 

scarxely,  hardly 
were  able 
marks  a  qucs- 

tion 
(?r  (in   a  ques- 

tion) 
sufficientty, 

enough 

active    (ht.    not 
sluggish) 


•Note  the  Ablative  withouta  Preposition,  here  meaning  'with': 
pluviis  foedum,  hideous  with  rains.  Coinpare  §  15,  creber  pueris, 
crotvded  with  boys. 


PREPARATIONS 


§i8. 

incola  antiquus 

seep.75(Rule 

flavus,  a,  um 

yellow 

of  Genders) 

mcmbrum 

limb  [member] 

ferus,  a,  um 

savage 

robustus,  a,  um 

stnrdy,  robust 

bellicosus,  a,  um 

warlike 

Caledonius 

Caledonian 

erant 

were 

Cambria 

Wales 

hasta* 

spear 

coloratus,  a,  um 

sufi-burnt 

sagilta 

arrotv 

[colouied] 

essedum 

chariot 

statura 

height,  stature 

inter  se 

aiiiong  them- 

niger,  nigra, 

selves,  with 

nigrum 

black  [nigger] 

one  another 

universT,  ae,  a 

all 

pugnabant 

t/iev  used  to 

[universal] 

fight 

vitrum 

woad  (blue 

proelium 

bat-tle 

colouring 

delectabant 

used  to  delight 

niatter) 

dlversus,  a,  um 

diverse,  differ- 

colorabant 

iised  to  colour 

ent 

hodiernus,  a,  um  of  the  present 

populus 

tribe  [a  people] 

day 

Celta 

Celt 

vestlmentum 

gannent 

slcut 

as  (lit.  so  as, 

[vestment] 

just  as) 

corium 

skin 

Germanus 

Gerinan 

con-stabant 

tised  to  con-sist 

capillus 

Jiair 

Note  Ablative  without  Preposition  (hastis,  7vith  spears). 


Past  Imperfect  Tense  of  'sum 

and  Ist  Conjug-ation 

ist    Person 
2nd  Person 
3rd    Pkrson 

SINGULAR. 

eram,  I  ivas 

erSs,  thou  wast  (you  were) 

erat,  he  (she,  it)  zvas 

PLURAL. 
erfimuB,  we  were 
erStis,  you  were 
erant,  they  were 

ist    Person 
2nd  Person 
3rd   Person 

spectSbam,  /            ->  ^ 
spectSbSs,  you            l  ^ 
gpectabat,  he(she,  it)]  % 

spectabamua,  we      -\  ^ 
spectabatis,  yju        J-5 
spectSbant,  they       J  "c 

The  verb  'do,'  /  give,  has  the  first  a  short  in  the  Past  Im- 
perfect :  dibam,  dibas,  dibat,  dibamus,  dibatis,  dSbant. 


8o 


PREPARATIONS 


§19. 

KS"  In  this  and  the  foUowing  Preparations  the  verbs  of  the  ist  Con- 
jugation  Present  or  Past  Imperfect  Tense  will  be  given  in  the  ist  Person  Sing. 
of  ihe  Prescnt. 


hTc 

here^  at  tliis 

GalHa 

Gaul 

point 

in  (with  Acc.) 

to,  into 

nonne 

not  ?  ( =  non  H- 

causa* 

for  the  sake 

ne ;  cf.  ver- 

frumentum 

corn 

umne,  §17) 

armentum 

herd 

ille 

/le  {i.e.  the 

catulus 

dog 

teacher) 

venaticus,  a. 

um 

hunting 

aedifico 

I  build,  §12 

servus 

slave 

loca  (neuter) 

plural  of 'locus 

captlvus 

captive 

(masc.)  place 

exporto 

I  eyport 

fiimatus,  a,  um 

fortified 

frenum 

bridle 

quintus,  a,  um 

fifth 

vitrea  (neut. 

pl.) 

glass  vessels 

Bellum  Gallicum 

the  Gallic  War 
(nameofone 

gemma 

gcni  prccious 
sto?ie 

of  Caesar's 

ceterl,  ae,  a 

the  others,  the 

works) 

7-est 

muiti  (masc.) 

maiiy  (j>eopk) 

cetera  (neut.) 

the  othertJiings, 

puto 

Ifa?ic}\  think 

Eng.  'etcetera 

itaque 

therefore, 

importo 

/  ifnport 

accordingly 

mediocricer 

mode?-ateIy, 

plane 

altogether 

tolerably 

barbarus,  a,  um 

barl>arotiS 

humanus,  a, 

um 

civilized 

agrl  cultfira 

agriculture 

[humane] 

(cultivation 

nec 

a?id  ?iot 

of  the  land) 

multum 

viuch,  very 

etiam 

even,  also 

dlversus  a 

different  froin 

mercatura 

cojnmerce 

a  =  ab,  §1 

[merchandize] 

Galll 

thc  Gauls 

Venetl 

a  tribe  on  the 

west  coast  of  Gaul 

•Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Prcposition,  hcre  meaning  'by': 
causa,  hterally  by  cause  or  by  reason  ;  hence  for  the  sake. 


PREPARATIONS 


8i 


§20 


mortui 

the  dead 

sacer,  sacra, 

cremo 

I  burn 

sacrum 

sacrcd 

sepulchrum 

tomb 

sacra  (neut.  pl.) 

sacrcd  ritei 

[sepulchre] 

cf.  vera,  §i6; 

urna 

urn 

mediterranea 

pulchre 

beautifully 

Druidae  (masc.) 

Druids 

ornatus,  a,  um 

ornamented 

saevus,  a,  um 

savage,  cruel 

fabricare 

to  mamifacturc 

femiiia 

xcoman 

[fabricate] 

pro  victimls 

instead  of 

in-humanus,  a, 

um  un-civilized 

(Abl.) 

victims, 

rota 

wheel 

as  victims 

ferriitus,  a,  um 

fitted  with  iron 

sacrifico 

I  sacrifice 

animl  causa 

for  the  sake  of 

miser,  misera. 

ainusement 

miserum 

unhapfy, 

(Ht.  oftfu  mind) 

?niserable 

esca 

food,  eating 

crucio 

I  torture 

medilerranea 

trucldo 

I  slaughter 

(neut.  pl.) 

Midlands 

simulacrum 

image 

(midland 

plenus,  a,  uni 

filled  (with  ihe 

parts;  cf 

Abl.);  or///// (with  the 

vera,  §i6) 

Gcn.),  § 

13.  §16. 

humo 

/  bury      ■ 

discordia 

quarrgl 

ferlna* 

flesh  of  wild 

[discord] 

animals. 

inter  se 

see  §  18  :   inter 

game 

se  pugnabant 

victito 

I  live 

victoria 

victory 

deus 

god 

parabant 

say  prepared 

fanum 

shrine 

the  way  for 

htcus 

grove 

*Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition,  here  meaning  'by 
means  of ' :    ferin;x  victitabant,  they  lived  on  (  =  by  means  of)  game. 

Summary  of  meanings  of  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition: 
from  (§6,  §12)  ivith  (jgi^,  17,  18,  20  after  plena) 

at  (§9)  by  (§19) 

in  (§  10,  §i6)  by  means  <)/"(§ 20) 

6 


S2 


PREPARATIONS 


VII.    Footprints  of  thc  Romans. 

§21.  I^  From    this   point  onwards  the  a   of  the  Ablative    Singular, 
Declension,  is  not  distinguished  by  the  long  mark  in  the  text. 


nuper 

recently,  lately 

ambulabitis 

yoti  will  walk 

me-cum 

zvith  me 

nobls-cum 

with  us 

delectabit 

it  will  delight 

ego  vero 

I  ifideed 

inquam 

I  say 

ambulabo 

will  walk 

visitare 

to  visit 

te-cum 

with  thee,  with 

sto 

I  stand 

you 

monstra 

shoiv 

niihi 

io  me 

nobls 

to  us 

pergratus,  a,  um 

very  pkasing 

amabo  te 

please  (lit.  / 

nioiistrabis 

you  7vill  sho7V 

shall  loveyori) 

festlna  lente 

hasten  slo7vly 

ruTnae  (pltir.) 

rieins 

i.e. 

dontgo  too  jfazi 

Rutuplnus,  a,  um 

belonoing  to 

nullus,  a,  um  (ir 

- 

Richborough 

regular  in  Gen. 

tum 

then 

and  Dat.  Sing.^ 

710 1  any 

longus,  a,  um 

long 

disputo 

I  dispute 

aliquando 

some  day 

quota  hora 

at  zvhat  Jiour, 

monstrabo 

I  will  show 

at  7vhat  cfclock 

{them) 

paratus,  a,  um 

prepared,  ready 

cras 

to-morrow 

erilis 

you  ivill  be 

vobls 

to  you 

quinta  hora 

at  thefifth  hout 

gratus,  a,  um 

pleasitig 

i.e.  ( 

it  eleven  dclock 

erit 

it  will  be 

inquiunt 

they  say 

amlnilabimus 

we  shall  tvalk 

§22. 

postrldie 
serenus,  a,  um 
ientaculum 
dabitis 

vos  in  \\zxvi. 


cenare 


on  the  next  day 
clcar  [serene] 
breakfast 
ivill  you  give 
yourselves  to 
the  road 
i.e.  will  you  start 

to  siip,  to  dine 
from  ceno,  I  sup 


pot-eritis 
Uubrls* 
adventabunt 
intra  duas 

horas 
ambulare 
pot-erimus 
iinus,a,um(irre2; 


willyou  be  ablt 
from  Dovcr 
will  arrive 
within  tivo 

hours 
to  'iValk 
wc  shall  be  ablt 
one 


inG.  &D.Sing.) 


PREPARATIONS 


83 


red-anibulabimus  tve  shall  ivalk 

back 

decimus,  a,  um  tetith 

undecimus,  a,  um  eleventh 

doml  at  home 

spero  /  hope 

ieiunus,  a,  um  huNgry 

trimus  shall  we  be 


nihil 

gustabimus 

prandium 

vobis-cum 

portate 

crustulum 

pomum 

curabo 


nothing 

we  shall  iasle 

liinch 

with  yoii 

carry 

cake 

apple 

will  provide 


*Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Prcposition,  here  meaning  'from.' 
RuLE. — Names  of  Towns  take  no  Prepositions  to  exprcss  the 
mcaning  '  from  '  or  '  to  '  with  a  verb  of  *  going.' 


Future  Tense  of  'sum'  and  Ist  Conjugation. 


ISt 

Person 

2nd 

Person 

3rd 

Person 

ISt 

Person 

2nd 

Person 

Srd 

Pbrson 

SINGULAR. 
era,  /  shall  be 
eris,  thou  will  be 

{yoti  will  be) 
erit,  /le  (she,  it)  will  be 


•pectabO,  /  shall  see 
■pectabifl,  thou  zvilt  see 
(you  will  see) 
■pectSbit,  he  (ske,  it)  willsee 


PLURAL. 
erimua,  we  shall  be 
eritis,  you  will  be 

erunt,  they  will  be 


spectabiiuus,  we  shall  see 
epectabitis,  you  will  see 

spectSbunt,  they  will  see 


NoTE. — The  verb  '  do,'  I give,  has  the  a  short  in  the  Futurc  : 
dabo,  dabis,  dabit,  dabimus,  dabitis,  dabunt.  Also  in  'dare,'  to 
give  ;  and  see  notes  on  §5  and  §18. 


Imperative  of  Ist  Conjug-ation. 


2nd  Person. 


SINGULAR. 
■pect&,  see  (thoti) 


PLURAL. 
■pectSte,  see  (ye) 


84 


PREPARATIONS 


§23- 

tS"  In  ihis  anJ  the  following  Preparationsnew  verbs  of  the  ist  Conjugation, 
Future  or  Imperative,  will  be  given  in  the  ist  Pers.  Sing.  of  the  Present. 


appropiiKiuo 

cupide 

exspecto 

ad  sonum 

tintinnabulum 

properavl 

ecce 

ad  ianuam 

intraverunt 

exclamavimus 

euge 

opportune 

adventavistis 


sero 


/  approach 

eagerly 

I  expect 

at  thi  sound 

bell 

I  hastened 

beJiold 

at  the  door 

they  entered 

ive  exclaimed 

bravo  ! 

in  the  nick  of 
ii7ne  [opportunely] 

yoii  have 
arrived 

marks  a  ques- 
tion,  like 
whether 

late 


adventavimus       ice  have 

arrived 
fere  almost 

tertius,  a,  um        third 
fuit  it  was 

nos  dedimus*        we  gave  our- 

s»lves 
celeriter  quickly 

non  pot-est  is  not  abie,  can 

not 
fatigatus,  a,  um    //>!?(/ [fatigued] 
quota  hora  est  ?    wh(it  o^clock  is 

itl 
noiidum  not  yet 

ad  ambulandum  for  wa/king 
nos  vero  that  we  are  ! 

(parati  sumus)      (cf.  §21) 
bene  ambulate     lit.  ivalk  7cell, 

i.e.  good  bye 


*It  is  well  for  the  pupil  lo  realize  from  the  first  that  there  is  no  Conjugalion 
in  which  all  the  verbe  form  their  Perfect  Stems  in  the  same  way.  Such 
forniations  as  '  dedi'  are  irregular  only  so  far  as  the  Stem  is  concerned. 


§24. 


inter  viam 

on  the  way 

propinquus,  a,  um  ncighbouring 

multa 

many  tliings 

paravit 

Jie  preparcd 

de  (with  Abl.) 

about 

quinquagesimus 

1 

narravit 

toid  [narrated] 

a,  uin 

fiftieth 

prlmus,  0,  um 

first  (for  Abl. 

copiae  (plural) 

forces 

cf.  §10) 

transportavit 

he  transported 

ante  Chr.  natum 

cf  §10 

navigavit 

/le  sai/ed 

bello 

/  wage  zvar 

quo 

w/iit/ier,  to 

postquam 

after,  when 

ivhic/i 

Nervii 

a  tribe  in 

appHcavit 

/le  brought  to 

Bel:i;ium 

land 

de-bellavit 

he  defeated 

diu 

tong 

contra  (with  Acc. 

)  against     ' 

disputaverunt 

/uive  disputed 

PREPARATIONS 


85 


ad  navigia 
applicanda 

idoneus,  a,  um 

Dubras* 

armatus,  a,  um 

alius  (irregular  in 
declension) 

fuerunt 

per  (with  Acc.) 

properaverunt 

pugna 

ad  pugnam 


for  vesseis  to  be 
broiighi  to  latid 

fitted,  siiitable 
to  Dover 
armed 

another 
were 
along 
hastened 
fight,  batt/e 
for  battle 


paraverunt  {they)  prepared 

se  theviselves 

necesse  tiecessary 

Romanls  (Dat.)   for  the  Ro- 
nians 


ad  ancoras  de- 
ligare 

vadum 
cquitaverunt 


tofasten  to 
atichors, 
to  anclior 

shai/ow  p/ace 

they  rode 


copiam  dedeiunt  they  gave  an 
opportunity 


*The  Accusative  of  the  naaiie  of  a  Town  without  a  Prepositon 
sometimes  means  'to — ';  cf.  Rule,  §22. 


Perfect  Tense  of  'sum'  and  Ist  Conjug-ation. 


ist    Person 
2nd  Person 

3rd   Person 


ist    Person 
2nd  Person 

3rd   Person 


SINGULAR. 
fui,  I  was 
fuuti,  thou  wast 

(you  were) 
fuit,  he  {she,  it)  was 


spectaTi,  I  saw 
spectSvisti,  thou  sawest 

(yoii  saw) 
spectavit,  he  (she,  it)  saw 


PLURAL. 
fuimus,  we  were 
fuistis,  yoH  were 

fuerunt,  they  were 


spectavimus,  we  saw 
spectSvistis,  you  saw 

spectaverunt,  they  saw 


NoTES.  I. — The  Perfect  may  often  be  translated  I  /lave  been, 
I  /lave  seen,  etc.  ;  virl  docti  disputaverunt,  /earned  ?ncn  /lave 
disputed. 

2. — The  verbs  '  do,'  /  give,  and  '  sto,'  /  stand,  unHke  other 
verbs  of  thc  ist  Conjugation,  mnke  the  Perfects  '  dcd-i,'  /  gave, 
'  sici-i,'  /  stood ;  but  ihe  endings  (-1,  -isti,  -it,  -imus,  -istis,  -erunt) 
iire  the  same  as  in  other  Perfects  ;  thus  '  dcd-erunt,'  they  gave. 


86 


PREPARATIONS 


§2S 

i^  In  this  anil   the  follouing  Preparations  new  verbs  of  the  ist  Conj., 
Perfect  Tense,  will  be  given  in  the  ist  Person  Singular  of  the  Present. 


adventaveramus 

we  had  arrived 

nisi 

uniess,  if .  .  noi 

hlc 

here 

ignavus,  a,  um 

coivardly 

campus 

the  plain 

certe 

at  any  raie 

apertus,  a,  um 

open 

officium 

duty 

ad  copias 

for  forces 

praesto 

I  perforvi 

explicandas 

io  be  deployed 

congregaverant 

had  gathered 

illlc 

yonder 

impigre 

activeiy, 

fortasse 

perhaps 

bravely 

piscatorius,  a,  um 

fishing 

confusus,  a,  um 

confused 

deligaverat 

had  fastefied 

primo 

atfirst 

col-locaverant 

had  placed 

laboro 

I  iabour,  am  in 

[located] 

difficuliies 

incitaverant 

had  urged 

tandem 

at  iength 

[incited] 

propulso 

I  drive  o(f 

reliquus,  a,  um 

the  rest 

occupo 

Iseize  [occupy] 

dubito 

I  hesitate 

fuga 

flight 

[doubt] 

dederant 

had  given 

aquili-fer 

the  eagk-bearer 

numquam 

never 

aquila 

the  eagle 

antea 

before 

congrego 

I  gather  [con- 
gregatej 

steterant 

had  stood 

laudandus,  a,  um  laudable 

Pluperfeet  Tense  of  'sum'  and  Ist  Conjugation. 


ist    Person 
2nd  Person 

3rd  Person 


ist    Person 

20(1    l'ERSON 

3rd    Person 


SINGULAR. 
fueram,  /  had  been 
fueras,  thou  hadst  been 
{you  had  been) 
fuerat,  he  {she,  it)  had  been 


apectaveram,  /  had  seen 
BpectaTera»,  thou  hadst  seen 

{you  had  seen) 
spect&verat,  he  {she,  ii)  had 
seen 


PLURAL. 
fueramm,  we  had  been 
fueratis,  you  had  been 

fuerant,  they  haJ  been 


Bpectaveramua,  we  haJ  seen 
spectaTeratis,  you  had  seen 

spectayerant,  they  had  seen 


PREPARATIONS 


87 


§26. 

iS"  After    this  Preparation    new  verljs  of  the   ist  Conjugation,   Pluperfect 
Tense,  wili  be  given  in  the  ist  Person  Singular  of  the  Present. 


postulo 

/  demand 

satiatus,  a,  um 

stitisfied 

septimus,  a,  um 

seventh 

mora 

dc/ay 

ruber,  rubra,  rub 

r- 

fuerit 

will  have  been 

um 

red 

quando 

when  1 

recreavermius 

we  shall  have 

per  (with  Acc.) 

throii^h,  during 

refreshed 

quinque 

five 

nos 

oiirselves 

alter,  altera, 

a  second,  an- 

domum 

hofnetvards. 

alterum 

other 

home 

(irregular  in  Gen 

adventaverimus 

ive  shall  have 

and  Dat.  Sing 

) 

arrived 

recreavero 

I  shall  have 

interea 

meamvhile 

refreshed 

mi  Antonl 

my  {dcar) 

me 

ffiyself 

Ajithonv 

cachinno 

I  laugh 

exspectaverit 

ivill  have 
expected 

mox 

soon 

Future  Perfect  of  'sum'  and  Ist  Conjugation.        j 

SISGULAR. 
fuero,  /  shall  have  been 
fuerifl,  thoii  ivilt  have  been 
{you  will  have  been) 
fuerit,  he  {she,  it)  ■will  have  been 

PLURAL. 
fuerimUB,  we  shmll  have  been 
fueritis,  you  wilt  have  been 

fuerint,  they  will  have  been 

BpectSverS,  /  shall  have  seen 
spectaTeriB,  thou  wilt  have  seen 
{you  ivill  have  seen) 
gpectSverit,  ke  (she,  it)  will  have  seen 

1 

spectSverimus,  we  shall  have  seen 
spectSveritis,  you  will  have  seen 

apectSverint,  they  will  have  seen 

88 


PREPARATIONS 


VIII.  First  expedition  of  C.  Julius  Catsar. 

§27-    i^Fion»  this  point  onwards  all  new  vcrbs  of  the   ist  Conjugation 
will  be  given  in  the  ist  Person  Singular  of  the  Prescnt. 


expeditio 

expedition 

inquimus 

we  say 

Caesaris* 

of  Caesar 

proconsul 

proconsiil 

calor 

heat 

ties 

three 

solis 

of  the  sun 

nationes 

tribes  [nations] 

aeris 

of  the  air 

duodesexagesim 

-  ffty  eighth,  lit. 

neque 

nor{and .  .  not) 

us,  a,  um 

2  froni  6oth 

paulo   post 

a  little  after 

Caesarem  pro- 

had  created 

solem  obscCirav- 

consulem  cre- 

Caesar  pro- 

erunt 

obscuredthesun 

averant 

C07lSul 

imber 

a  shower 

autem 

however 

sol 

tJie  sun 

esse 

to  be 

splendore  f 

with  splendour 

ex-istimo 

I  consider 

iterum 

a  second  time 
had     tempered 

[estima  te] 

calorem  temper- 

revera 

really 

averat 

the  heat 

ex  nationibus 

of  the  tribes 

de  Caesare  * 

about  Caesar 

auxilium 

/le/p,  aid 

imperatore 

general 

auxilia  (plur.) 

auxiliaries 

[emperor] 

subministro 

I  supply 

interrogo 

/  ask,  enquire 

Trinobantes 

a  British  tribe 

ciar 

why 

in  Essex 

expedltionem 

hc  prepared  his 

Cassi,  2 

a  tribein  Herts 

suam  paravit 

expedition 

imploro 

/  iviplore 

*  The  lelter  C  before  Julius  Caesar  stands  for  Gaius  (Gdiuiii,  Gdi,  Gdio). 
tNote  ihe  Ablative  wilhout  a  Preposition,  here  meaning  '  with' ;  c/-  §i5i  17,  20. 

Third  Declension. 
NouNS  LiKE  'Caesar,'  '  Expeditio,'  etc. 


SIXGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

Caesar,  Caesar 
Cassar,  0  Caesar 
Caesar-em,  Caesar 
Caesar-is,  Caesat^s 
Caesar-i,  to  Caesar 
cum  Caesar-e,  with  Caesar 

Caesar-es,  Caesars 
Caesar-es,  0  Caesars 
Caesar-es,  Caesars 
Caesar-um,  0/  Caesars 
Caesar-ibus ,  to  Caesars 
cum  Caesar-ibus,  with  Caesais 

PREPARATIONS 


89 


So  are  declined  words  like  'aer,'  air,  'sol,'  sun^  and  niany 
words  ending  in  or,  such  as  'calor,'  heat,  'splendor,'  s/^Ietidour, 
'imperator,'  commande?--in-chief.  So  too  are  declined  words  like 
'expeditio,'  expedition,  excfpt  that  they  havc  dropped  an  '  n '  in 
the  Nominative  Singular  :  thus  we  have — ■ 


.SINC.ULAR. 

1,  2  expeditio 

3  expeditidn  em 

4  expedition  is 

5  expedition  I 

6  in  expedition  e 


PLURAL. 
expedition  es 
expedition  es 
expcditionum 
expedition  ibus 
in  expedition-ibus 


(Many  words  ending  in  0,  especially  those  ending  in  ^/J  and  gOi 
have  also  a  change  of  vowel  in  the  stem  :  see  next  section,  note). 

Nouns  of  the  ^rd  Declension  in  io,  do,  or  go  are  nearly  all 
feminine,  except  when  they  denote  male  persons.  The  other 
nouns  decHned  hke  Caesar  are  mostly  masculine,  especially  those 
endins:  in  or. 


venia  pardon 

a  victor-ibus         from  the  victors 
ullus,  a,  um  any 

(irregular  in  Gen. 

and  Dat.  Sing.) 
nisi  except ;  cf.  §  35 

paucl,  ae,  a  afeiv 

proximus,  a  um    next ;  cf.  §  16 
miilto  maior-em    much    greater, 
lit.  grcater 
by  much 
sescentl,  ae,  a       six  hundred 
onerarius,  a,  um   of  burden 
legion-es  legions 

cum  multi-  with   a    jnu/ti- 

liidin-e*  tudi 


§28. 

avaritia 

avarice 

exspectatio 
praeda 
cupidus,  a,  um 

expectation 
booty ;  cf.  §  7 
desirous 

vlsitandi 

of  visiling 

explorandl 
ignotus,  a,  um 

of  exploring 
unknoivn 

remotus,  a,  um 

remote 

ignotum 

pro  (with  Abl.) 

an  unknown 

thing 
for,  instead  of 

pro  magnifico  est  is  regarded  as  a 

magjiificent 

ihing 
com-par5  -^ g^^  together 

re-porto  I  carry  ojf 

*  Niite  that  thc  stcm  of  this  word  diffcrs  from  the  Numinative  Singular  iiot 
only  in  having  an  n,  but  also  in  ihe  change  of  vowel :  Nominative  Singular 
tnullitudo,  stem  mulliluJin-. 


90 


PREPARATIONS 


IX.    Pcace  violated. 

^  29.  tS'  In  the  followini^  Preparation  each  new  noun  of  the  ^rd  declension 
will  bs  given  only  once  (in  ihe  Nominalive  Singular,  wiih  the  stem  added  in 
brackets  whenever  it  differs  from  the  Neminative  Singular). 


pax  (pac-),  3 
violalus,  a,  uni 
violo 

aestas  (aestat-),  3 
quartus,  a,  um 
dux  (duc-),  3 
niiles  (milit-),  3 
eques  (equit-),  3 
tempestas 

(tempestat-),  3 
medius,  a,  um 
navigatio  (naviga- 

tion-),  3 
non  iam  flabat 
piospere 

labor  (labor-),  3 


feace 
violated 
I  violate 
summcr 
fourth 
leader  [duke] 
J(?/i'//(?r[mili!ary] 
horse-soldier 
weather 

[tempest] 
jiiid  * 
Toyage  [naviga 

tion] 
no  longer  blexv 
successfiiilj, 

prosperously 
labour.  toil 


remigandi  of  rowi?ig 

virtus  (vittut-),  3  piuck  [virtue] 
magnopere  greatly 

(cf.  quantopere     how  ffiuch) 
prior  (prior-),  3    /ohfter 
inde  thence 

trecenti,  ae,  a        three  hufidred 
castra  t,  2  caftip 

statio(station-),3  station 

in  stalione         on  guard 
reservo  /  reserve 

periculosus,  a,  um  dangerous 
defensor  (defen-  defetider 

sor-),  3  I 
nudare  to  strip  (cf. 

incitare,  to  urge  on  : 
spectarc,  §8;  §  12) 


*  In  media  navigatione,  literally  in  midvoyage  ;  but  we  should  generally  say 
in  EngUsh  ?'«  the  tniddle  of  the  voyage. 

t  A  neuter  phiral  noun  of  the  2nd  declension,  with  singular  meaning. 

JXote  the  Ablative  wilhout  a  Prcposition,  properly  meaning  '  from,'  but 
here  to  be  translated  by  '  of ' ;  so  in  §  12  and  §  6  we  might  translate  lii>er  scholit 
*  free  ^T/lessons,'  and  niililid  vacat  '  he  is  free  (T/service.' 

Third   Declension— ^-^/'///^/^«f.f^. 

NouNS  LiKE  '  Pax,'  '  Aestas,' etc. 
A  great  many  nouns  of  the  ^rd  Declension  differ  from  those 
aheady  learned  by  addifig  afi  s  to  the  Noinifiatii;*  Singu/ar ;  thus 
from  the  stem  'pac-'  we  get  the  Nominative  Singular  'pac-s' 
(written  with  the  letter  x  for  cs) ;  but  the  other  cases  are  formed 
from  the  stem  '  pac-.'  When  the  stem  ends  in  a  /  (or  d),  this  lettcr 
disappears  in  the  Nominative  Singular  when  the  s  is  added,  but 
not  in  the  oilier  cases.     Thus  we  dcchne — 

1,  2  p5x  aesta  s  niile-s  virtil-s 

3  pac  cni  aestatem  militem  virtut-em 

4  pac-is  aestat-is  milit-is  virtut-is 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 


PREPARATIONS 


91 


Nouns  of  ihe  ^rd  Declension  that  forni  the  Nominative 
Singular  by  adding  s  to  the  stem  are  mostly  feminine,  except 
those  which  denote  male  persons,  hke  'miles,'  so/cfur,  and  a  few 
others. 


§30. 

X.    Varied  contests. 

certamen 

con/esi 

tempus 

time 

(cerlamin-),  3  * 

(tempor-),  3  * 

[tempor-ary] 

vlto 

I  avoid 

agger,  3 

tnound 

fluwen 

river 

testudo  (teslu- 

tortoise-she//^ 

(flumin-),  3* 

din-),  3 

shelter  f 

egregie 

excellenily 

oppugno 

/  attack 

opus  (oper-),  3  * 

work  [oper-ate] 

vulnus 

woutid 

firmo 

/  strengthen 

(vulner-),  3  * 

[vulner  able] 

[make  firm] 

pondus 

weight 

nomen 

name 

(ponder-),  3* 

[ponder-able] 

(nomin-),  3* 

[nomin-ate] 

arma 

arms 

constat 

is  known 

(neut.  phir.). 

2 

domesticus,  a  um 

civil 

supero 

/  surpass 

[domestic] 

magnitudo 

size,  magnitude 

prae-paro 

I  prepare 

(magnitudin-). 

3 

arbor,  3, /f/«. 

tree 

robur 

sfrength 

vallum,  2 

rampart 

(robor-),  3  * 

[cor-robor-ate] 

pro-volo 

I  dashforth 

corpus 

body 

cf  volito,  §7 

(corpor-),  3* 

[corpor-al] 

niunitio,  3 

l?n/wark 

homo(homin-),  3 

man 

ahquanlum 

a  /ot,  a  consider 

robusto   cor- 

of  (ht.  witJi) 

ah/e  amoimt. 

porej 

robust  body 

•  The  nouns  in  thk  section  in  men,  us,  and  ur  are  Neuters,  and  therefof" 
have  the  Accusative  ihe  same  as  the  Nwininalive.  Note,  too,  ike  Nominalive 
and  Accusative  plurai  in  a. 

tThe  testuJo  was  an  arrangement  of  the  shields  of  the  soldiers  when  thcy 
atlackcii  a  fort  ;  it  looked  like  a  tortoisc-sheli. 

J  Note  the  Ablative  without  a  Prepositson,  here  translatable  by  'of  ;  the 
AMative  here  dcnotes  a  qualily  of  the  persons  spoken  of,  and  may  be  iherefore 
callcd  an  Adjectival  AWative. 

Third   Declension— rc«//««(r^. 

NouNS  LiKE  'Flumkn,'  ' Opus,'  Tempus.' 
Ncutcrs    ending   in    7}ien    have    stems    cnding    in    ;;////-    from 
whit  h  the  other  cases  are  formcd.    Neutcrs  ending  in  us  have  stems 
in  er-  or  or-.     The  last  vowel  of  these  stems  is  aiways  short. 


PREPARATIONS 


Note  that  the  Neuters  have  the  Accusative  the  sanie  as  the 
Nominative,  both  in  the  Singular  and  in  the  Plural  Number 
(as  in  2nd  Declcnsion),  and  that  their  Nominr.tive  and  Accusative 
Plural  end  in  a  (also  as  in  the  2nd  Declension). 


SING. 

PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

1,  2,  3       flumen 

flumin-a 

OpUB 

oper  a 

4             fluruin  is         flumin-um 

oper-ia 

oper-um 

5            fiumin-i 

fltlmin-ibus 

oper-I 

oper-ibus 

6       in  flumin  e 

in  flumin-ibus 

in  oper-e          in 

oper-ibus 

§31- 

pro-sum 

I  a77i  helpful, 

msectatio 

pursuit 

do  good 

(-ion-),  3 

fugo 

Iput  toflight 

revocare 

to  recall 

fugatus,  a,  um 

rouied 

novus,  a,  uii 

new 

in-sto 

I pursue  (Ut. 

arma  (Neut. 

here  fitiings 

(with  Dat.) 

step  upon) 

Pl.,  2) 

ignoro 

I  do  not  know 

ornandus,  a,  um 

to  be  equipped 

[ignore] 

(from  orno 

I  eguip,  adorn 

praeterea 

besides 

magno  opere 

»=  tnagnopere. 

incommodum,  2 

disaster 

(Abl.  of  opus) 

§  29 

nuntio 

I  announce 

diurnus,  a,  um 

of  the  day 

tempestas(  tat-),  3 

tetnpest 

nocturnus,  a,  um 

of  the  night 

litus  (Utor-),  3 

coast 

sine  (with  Abl.) 

without 

affticto 

wreck  [afllict] 

reparare 

to  refit,  repair 

§32. 

XI.    Roman   ships. 

genus  (gener-;,  3 

kind  [gener-al] 

octingentr,  ae,  a 

eighi  hundred 

navis  (Gen.  Pl. 

ship  [nav-y] 

hiems  (hiem-),  3 

winter 

navium),  3 

inter 

here  among 

navis  longa 

ship  of  war 

ducentl,  ae,  a 

t2V0  hundred 

classis  (Gen.  Pl. 

fleet 

opus  (with 

need  iof) 

classium),  3 

Abl.) 

onus  (oner-),  3 

l>urden[oner-ous] 

quomodo 

how 

transportandus,  a, 

to  be  irans- 

hostis  (Gen.Pl. 

enemy 

um 

ported 

hostium),  3 

[host-ile] 

ad  onera  trans- 

for  burdens  to 

IX)rtanda 

be  transported 

PREPARATIONS 

Third  DeeleTision— Co/i/tnued. 


93 


Most  nouns  of  two  syllables  belonging  to  ihe  ^rd  Docl.  and 
ending  in  is  have  the  same  form  for  the  Genitive  as  for  the 
Nominalive  Singular,  and  form  the  Genitive  Plural  in  u/m :  thus 
'navis,'  s/iip,  '  classis,' /V^/,  'hostis,'  ene77iy.  These  nouns  are 
niostly  feminine,  except  those  denoting  male  persons,  hke  '  hostis.' 


SIKGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

],  2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

nSvis 
nSvem 

navia 
nSvI 
in  nave 

nSvgg 
nSvgs 
navium 
nSvibus 
in  naviuus 

Note  that  all  these  forms  are  of  two'  syllables  except  the 
Genitive,  the  Dative,  and  the  Ablative  of  the  Pkiral.  The  Gen. 
Plur.  has  one  syllable  more  than  the  Nom.  Sing.,  as  in  §§27-31. 

NoTE. — Similarly  are  declincd  some  nouns  whose  Nominative 
Singular  ends  in  es,  e.g.,  'clades,'  disaster. 


§33- 

ornare  to  equip 

forma,  i  Jorm,  shape 

puppis,  3  •  stern,  poop 

accommodatus,  a,  suited  [accom- 

um 
carlna,  i 
planus,  a,  um 
robur  (robor-). 
ferreus,  a,  um 
funis,  3  * 
pellis,  3  * 
slve  .  .  .  slve 


modated  ] 
keel 

flat  [plane] 
hcre  oak 
viade  0/  iron 
rope 

skin,  hide 
ivhether  .  .  .  0/ 
propter(withAcc.)  on  account  of 

*  This  word  is  tleclin 
+  The  Roman  '  tormentuni 


llnum,  r:. 

quia 

phis  .  .  quam 

firmitOdo 

■(-tudin-),  3 
llneus,  a,  um 
tam  .  .  quam 
rostrum,  2 
turris,  3  * 
lamina,  i 
quid  opus 
tormcntum,  2 


flax 

because 

inore  .  .  than 

firmness 

made  of  flax 
so  .  .  as 
beak,  ram 
turret 
plate 
what  need 
a  macliine  for 
huTling  stones  t 


ed  like  '  navis,'  §  32. 
corresponds  to  our  cannon 


94 


PREPARATIONS 


§34-    XII.  Alliance  of  the  British  tribes. 

societas  alliance  flnis,  3  *  end 

(societat-),  3  [society]  fines,  Plur.,  m.  boundaries 

summus,  a,  um       chief  separ5  I separate 

imperium,  2  command  oriens(orient-),  3  the  East\ 

mando  /  entrust  [orient-al] 

rex  (reg-),  3  ki^ig  occidens  the  IVest 

gens  (gent-),  3        race  [gentilc]  (occident-),  3       [occident-alj 

Gen.  PJ.  gentium  superior  previous,  past 

princeps  (-cip- ,  3  prince  (superior-),  3 

tamen  nevertheless  conlinuus,  a,  um  continued,    un- 

pars  (part),  3         part  interrupted 

consocio  I  ally  inftnltus,  a,  um     infinite 

*Declined  like  '  navis,'  §  32. 

t'aboriente'  is  WtexMy  from  the  East ;  hence  on  the  East  side,  on  the 
East.     Similarly,  'ab  occidente,'  on  the  VVest. 

Third  Declension — Continued. 

Words  whose  stem  ends  in  two  consonants  form  the  Genitive 
Plural  in  iutn  (two  syllables  more  than  the  Nom.  Sing.):  thus 
'gens'  (stem  'gent-')  race,  'pars'  ('part-'), /ar/. 

Notice  that  if  the  stem  ends  in  a  /,  it  is  dropped  before  the  s 
which  is  added  to  form  the  Nominative  Singular,  as  in  §  29  ; 
thus  '  gens '  stands  for  '  gent-s ' ;  '  pars  '  for  '  part-s.' 

The  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  two  consonants  are  mostly 
feminme,  hke  other  Nouns  that  form  the  Nominative  Singular  by 
adding  s  to  the  stem  (§  29). 


SIXGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1,2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

gen-8 
gent-em 
gent-is 
gent-I 
cnm  gent-e 

gent-Ss 
gent  Sb 
gent-ium 
gent-ibuB 
cum  gent-ibus 

But  'urbs'  (stem  'urb-'),  city,  which  will  be  found  in  the  next 
section,  does  not  drop  any  letter  before  the  s  of  the  Nominative 
Singular ;  it  is  only  a  /  or  a  ^  that  is  dropped  before  ihe  s. 


rKEPARATIONS 


95 


§35- 

caput  (capit),  3,  n.    chapter 
duodecimus,  a,  uni  tivelfth 
tertius  decimus         thirieenth 
interior  (-ior-),  3        iiiierior 
Belgiuni,  2  JSel^i^ium 

ini  m  igro  /  ivtmigrate 

aetas  (-tat-),  3  age 

trans  (wiih  Acc.'>      across 
Khenus,  2  the  Rhine 

migro  I  migrate 

urbs  (urb-),  3  city  [urb-an] 

derlvatus,  a,  um        derivcd 

*  C.  §  27,  1.  16  esse  existiniabant. 

§36. 

longitudo 

(-tudin-),  3 
circiter 

quingentl,  ae,  a 
milia,  3  (Neut. 

Plur.  of  '  miHe,' 

a  thousand) 
septingentr,  ae,  a  seven  hundred 
octingentl,  ae,  a  ei^ht  hundrcd 
octogintfl  eighty 


de-monstro 
orl-o  (orlgin-),  3 
Iriquetrus,  a,  um 
esse  declaro 
latus  (later),  3 
Hispania,  i 
septentriones 
erro 

Hibernia,  i 
recte 
iudico 
Mona,  I 


Ipoint  out 
origin 
triangular 
Idec/are  to  be* 
side  [later-al] 
Spain 
the  A^orth  f 
I  err 
Ireland 
rightly 
I judge 
Anglesey 


t  lit.  ihe  seve>i  oxen  (Charles  Wain). 


XIII.    The  British  seas. 

length 

[longitude] 
about 

five  hundred 
mi/es,  lit.  thou- 
sands  {pj paces) 


mare  (Abl.  Sing.  the  sea 

mari),  3,  Ncut. 
di-stare  to  be  distant 

igitur  t/iere/ore,  t/ien 

maria  seas 

circum-do  I  surround 

Hibernicus,a,um  Iris/i 
marium  of  t/ie  seas 

usitatus,  a,  uni      used,  usua/, 
coinmon 


Third  Declension— r^/'^/'/////^'^. 

Nouns  ending  in  e  like  '  mare,'  sea,  of  the  ^rd  Declension  are 
Neuter.  They  form  the  Ge.nitive  Plural  in  ium,  the  Nominative 
and  Accusative  Plucal  in  ia,  and  the  Ablative  Singular  (like  the 
Dative  Singular)  in  t.     Thus 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

1,  2,  3          mare 

4  maris 

5  mari 

6  in  mari 

maria 
marium 
maribus 
in  maribus 

1 

96 


PREPARATIONS 


§37- 

XIV.    Britain  subdued. 

pacatus,  a,  um 

siibdued 

ordo  (-din-),  3       rank 

concursio  (-ion-), , 

3  engagement 

[ordin  ary] 

[ex-cursion] 

consulto                 on  purpose 

iter  (itiner-),  3  * 

march 

[by  consultation 

fortiter 

l)}-avely 

essedarius,  2         charioleer 

impugno 

I  attack 

pes  (ped  ),  3,  m.  foot 

cohors  (cohort-), 

cohort 

pedibus             onfoot 

3t 

ita                          thus 

sui 

iheir  oivn  me?i 

mobilitas  (-tat-),  3  mobiliiy 

perturbo 

I  perturb^ 

stabiUtas  (-tat-),  3  stability 

ihrow  inio 

pedes  (pedit-),     footsoldier 

confusion 

3t 

mos  (mor-),  3 

custom 

praesto  (cf.  ^25   I exhibit 

iustus,  a,  um 

Just,  proper 

huiusmodi             of  this  kind 

omnes 

all 

intervallum,  2       interval 

*This  is  a  very 

peculiar  word  ;  tV 

e  Nominalive  Singular  is  noi  formeil 

directly  from  the  stem. 

t  Declined  like  '  pars'  (stem  '  part- '),  §  34. 

:[:  Declined  like  'mllea'  (stem  'milit-'),  'eques'  (stem  '  equit-'),  §29. 

§38. 


collis,  3* 

hill 

servo 

here  1 7vaich 

legatus,  2 

Ueutenant- 

paunum 

a  little 

general  [legate] 

decUno 

I  turn  aside 

subito 

suddenly 

[decline] 

superior  (cf.  ^ 

34)  superior,  victor- 

de  via 

fiom  ihe  road 

ious 

vasto 

I  lay  ivaste 

quattuor 

four 

[de-vast-ate 

•Declined  like  '  na 

vis,'  '  hostis,'  §  3 

2 

§39- 

rfpa,  I 

bank 

palOs  (palfid 

),  3 

marsh 

sudis,  3  * 

stake 

oviSj  3  * 

sheep 

acutus,  a,  um 

sharp  [acute] 

bos  (bov-),  3 

t 

ox 

profundus,  a, 

um  rti^tY/ [profound] 

duabus 

Abl.  o{  duae 

caput  (capit-), 

3,n.  head;  cf.  §  35 

expugno 

I  takc  hy  stoi  11 

longe 

far 

*  Declined  like 

fugo 

'  n.-ivis,'  §  32. 

I put  loflight 

tThisis  an 

rrcgular  word  :   bos,  bo 

v-em,  -is,    i,    e  ; 

Gcn 

.  Plu)-.  l>o-uin. 

PREPARATIONS 


97 


§40. 

prae-suni  (with 

/  am  in  com- 

dcfectio  (-ion-),  3 

defection 

Diit.) 

mand  0/ 

condicio(-ion-),3 

condition 

pugnandl 

offishting;  cf. 

dellbero 

I  delibcrate 

.   §  28,  1.  3 

veto 

Iforbid 

frustra 

in  vain 

vexo 

I  annoy,  vex 

victores 

—  zvere  victors 

tributum,  2 

tribute 

clvitas  (-tat-),  3 

state  [city] 

impero 

I  iinpose 

oro 

/  ask,  entreat 

(Dat.) 

{itpon) 

confirmo 

I  establisli 

obses  (obsid-),  3 

hostage 

[connrm] 

pro  (with  Abl.) 

for,  on  bthalfof 

tot  (indeclinable 

so  many 

(cf.  §§28,  33) 

adj.) 

ara,  i 

altar 

clades,  3  * 

disastcr 

foCUS,    2 

hearth 

maxinie 

chiefly 

tropaeuni,  2 

trophy  • 

*  This  and  some  olher  nouns  of  the  3td  Dcclensi',)n  difier  from  '  navis '  only 
in  ihe  Nominative  Singiilar  ;  see  §  32  (Note).  In  ihese  woids  thc  NominaLivt; 
and  Accusalive  Plural  is  the  samo  as  the  Nominative  Singular. 


§41- 

XV.    Hea 

rts  of  oak. 

aes  (aer-),  3,  n. 

brass 

digitus,  2 

finger  [digit] 

triplex  (triplic-), 

triple 

monstrans 

■  pointing 

3.  adj. 

(monstrant-). 

3,  adj. 

fortis,  3,  adj. 

brave,  strong 

statio  (-ion-),  3 

here  road- 

admlrabiiis,3,adj. 

admirable 

steadjd.^^g 

insigne,  Neuter  of 

tutus,  a,  um 

safe 

insignis,  3,  adj. 

distinguished 

illae 

yon,  those 

facinus  (facinor-), 

deed,  achieve- 

optime 

exce/ientiy, 

3 

ment 

here  =  hurrah 

quod 

that 

adiiuc 

hitherto{\\\\c  = 

orbis,  3,  m. 

circle  [orb] 

hither,  ad  =  to) 

orbis  terrarum 

=  the  world 

grandis,  3,  adj. 

big  [grandj 

tam 

so  (cf  §33) 

per-grandis,  3, 

very  bii{ 

mirus,  a,  um 

wonderful 

adj. 

sentcntia,  i 

opinion 

omnis,  3,  adj. 

every 

comprobo 

I  approve  of 

omnCs,  PUir. 

all 

nonus,  a,  um 

ninth 

arici  (ariel-),3,m 

.  ram 

NOTE. — The  heading  (Robur  et  aes  Iriplejc)  is  a  quotation  from  Ilorace 
(Odes  I.  3,  9)  and  is  here  applied  bolh  to  the  courage  of  the  ancient  liritona 
aml  to  the  modein  ships  of  war  described  in  this  seciion. 


98 


PKLrARATlONS 


§42. 


veteianus,  a,  um 

veteran,  old 

prOpositum,  2 

proposal 

milito 

I  ser-oe 

per-gratus,  a,  um 

very  pleasing 

custos(custod-),  3 

guard 

ad  navigandum 

for  sai/ing 

Grandis,  3,  adj. 

ihe  Majestic 

denego 

Isay  no  [deny] 

Regalis,  3,  adj. 

ihe  Royal  Sov- 

omnia,  Neut.  Pl. 

all  things, 

ereign 

of  omnis 

everything 

Magnifica,  i,  adj. 

the  Aiagnificen  t 

dulce,  Neut.  Sing 

.  sweet,  p/easant 

Tonans  (Tonant-) 

ihe  Thunderer 

ofdulcis,  3,  ad_ 

■ 

3>  adj. 

lenis,  3,  adj. 

gent/e  [lenient] 

Arrogans  (Arro- 

the  Arrogant 

brevl,  Abl.  Sing. 

drie/,  short 

gant-),  3,  adj. 

of  brevis,  3. 

Ferox  (Feroc-),  3, 

the  Furious 

adj. 

adj. 

lit.  warlike 

classiaril,  2 

seajnen,  mcn  oj 

tegimen  (-min-),  3 

covering 

thefleet 

in  GrandT 

in  the  Majestic 

ingens  (ingent-), 

huge 

(Abl.  of  Grandis) 

3.  adj. 

praefectus  classis 

adfniral 

machina 

niachine 

cur 

why 

Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension. 

Adjectives  of  the  ^rd  Declension  in  is  are  decUned  : — 

(i)    in    the     Masculine    and    Feminine    hkc    '  navis '    (§32), 

except  that  the  Ahlative  Sing-ular  ends  in  i  (not  -e) : 
(2)  in  the  Neuler  Hke  '  mare '  (§  36). 


SINGULAK. 

PLURAL. 

1 

1,  2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

masc.  and/cm.                     neul. 

fortis                    forte 
fortem                   forte 
fortis                     fortis 
forti                     forti 
forti                     forti 

niasc.  and/ein.                  neut. 

fortes                   fortia 
fortes                    fortia 
fortium                 fortium 
fortibus                fortibus         j 
fortibus                fortibus 

PkEPARATIONS 


99 


Some  adjectives  of  the  ^rd  Declension  which  do  not  end  in 
i's  have  no  separute  form  for  the  Nominative  Singular  of  the 
Neuter ;  in  the  Masculine  and  Feminine  tlicy  are  dechned  like 
'gens'  (§34):  thus— 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

niasc  andjem,                     neut. 

masc  and /em. 

neut. 

1,  2 

ingens 

ingena 

ingentea 

ingentia 

3 

ingentem 

ingens 

ingentgs 

ingentia 

4 

ingentis 

ingentis 

ingentium 

ingentium 

5 

ingenti 

ingenti 

ingentibus 

ingentibu3 

C 

ingenti 

ingenti 

ingcatibua 

ingentibus 

§43- 

adversus,  a,  um 

adverse 

somnio 

/  dixain 

taberna,  i 

ifiH  [tavern] 

membrls  robustls 

Abl.  * 

tenebrae,  i,  Plur. 

darkness 

tcrra  marlque 

liy  land  and  by 

hix  (luc-),  3 

light 

sea 

anxius,  a,  um 

aiixious 

pugnans  (pugn- 

fishting 

multa,  Neut.  Pl. 

many  thiiigs 

ant-),  3,  adj.f 

of  niuUus 

salvus,  a,  um 

saje 

ambulati6(-ion  ),3 

walk 

fac  (Imperative 

inake 

utihs,  3,  adj. 

useful 

of  'fLicio,' 

vehiculum,  2 

carriage 

/  make, 

[vehicle] 

mater  (matr-), 

ntothcr 

nox  ( 

noct-),  3 

night 

*  The  Abl.  is  here  translatable  by  '  with'  ;  cf.  rdhiistd  corpore,  §  30. 

t  The  Adjecdves  in  -avs  (steni  -ant)  arc  dcclincil  like  iugens  (stem  in^ent-), 
the  only  difference  bcin;^  in  the  iast  vowel  of  the  ster.) 


1 


DRILL    EXERCISKS. 

[Tbe  sections  of  ihcse  drill  exercises  are  numliered  to  cor'?<pond  wiih  thc 
sections  of  ihe  tcxt  on  which  theygive  practice.  AU  the  Wtrds  o.curringin  them 
wil!  lie  found  in  the  corresponding  sections  of  the  "  Prcp.trations "  (pp.  59  ff.) 
The  Latin  scntfnces  may  he  used  for  viva  voce  praclice,  and  may  be  varicd  at 
the  discretion  of  ihe  teacher  by  sub.stituting  othcr  words  that  havc  bcen  uscd  in 
the  text  of  the  story.  They  will  also  serve  as  models  for  translating  the  English 
sentences  that  foUow  them  into  Latin.  The  nur/ibers  in  brackets  in  tht 
Exercises  refer  to  seclions  o/lhe  "  Preparations"  not  to  sections  ofthe  Exercises 
thewselves  ;  and  they  servethe  purpose  of  an  English-Latin  Vocabulary.  Thus 
in  Ex.  4  (/.  loj)  the  reference  to  %3  after  the  worJ  ^for'  nieans  that  the 
Latin  word  'juanted  ■will  be  found  in  %2  ofthe  Preparations  {p.  6i),1 

§r,   {Nominaiive  and  Ablative  Singular.) 

Villa  est  bella. 

Castanea  est  bella. 

Ancilla  in  villa  habitat. 

Ora  maritima  non  procul  a^  villa  est. 

Non  procul  ab  ora  maritima  habito. 

Sub  castanea  interdum  canto. 


How  prctty  is  the  chestnut-tree  ! 
Not  far  froni  the  chestnut-tree  a  nightingale  sings. 
Not  far  from  ihe  country-house  is  the  sea-shore.- 
Not  far  from  the  sea-shore  is  the  chestnut-tree. 
In  the  country  house  I  now  Uve. 

^  d  is  used  for  ab  bcfore  a  consonant. 

''Order  of  Words,  Rule  I. — Put  the  Adjective  immediately  AFTEH 
ita  Noun.  The  English  ordcr  is  just  the  opposite  ;  ihus  \\!,ure  Eni^lish  say? 
'  a  pretty  house,'  Lalin  says  'a  house  prelty';  where  En.^;  S  s.-»ys  '  Ihe  sea 
shore '  or  '  the  maritime  shore'  Latin  says  '  the  shore  m.  liii  nc.'  This  rule 
applies  also  to  Possessive  Adjectives,  like  '  my,'  'yiur,'  '  his,'  'our,' 
'their':  thus  where  English  says  '  my  aunt'  Lntin  s.ys  '  aunt  mine.'  But 
the  rule  does  not  apply  lo  Adjectives  used  with  llte  verh  'to  !  •,'  a<;  in  '  the 
country-hoiise  is  prelty  '  or  '  how  pretty  ihe  country-house  is  !' 


I02  DRILL    EXERCISES 

§1   C07itinued.     {Ge?iitive  Singnlar.) 

Amita  mea  sub  umbra  castaneae  interdum  cantat. 

Cum  amita  mea  sub  umbra  castaneae  interdum  canto. 

Ancilla  amitae  mcae  in  villa  habitat. 

Ancilla  in  villa  amitae  meae  habitat 

lanua  iion  procul  ab  ora  maritima  est. 


My  aunt's  country  house  is  pretty. 

The  door  of  the  country-Iiouse  is  not  far  from  the  sea- 
shore.  ^ 

Where  is  the  nightingale? 

The  nightingale  sometimcs  sings  under  the  shade  of  tlie 
chestnut-tree. 

The  nightingale  does  not  Hve  (say  not  lives)  in  the  chestnul 
tree. 


After  §T.    Conversation. 

Q.   Ubi  est  villa  ? 

A.  Villa  non  procul  ab  ora  maritima  esL 

Q.   Ubi  est  castanea  ? 

A.  Casianea  in  area  est. 


^Order  of  Words,  Rui.e  2. — Put  tlie  Adverb  BEFORE  the  Verb  Of 
other  word  v^hich  it  qualifies.  The  English  order  is  often  difiTerent  ;  thus 
where  English  says  '  sings  well '  Latin  says  '  well  sings.'  English  may  say 
'  sings  sometimes'  or  'sometimes  sings,'  but  Latin  always  says  '  sometimes 
oings.'  This  rule  applies  to  the  Adverb  non,  which  must  always  come 
immediately  before  the  word  which  it  negatives  ;  and  it  also  applies  to 
Adverbial  phrases  formed  wlth  Prepositions,  such  as  '  far  from  the  sea-shorc ', 
'  under  the  shade  of  the  chestnut-tree  ' ;  thus  for  '  ihe  nightingalc  sings  under 
ihe  shade  of  the  chestnut-tree'  say  '  the  nightingale  under  iho  shade  of  thc 
chestnut-tree  sings  ', 


DRILL   EXERCISES  IO3 

Q.  Ubi  ancilla  cenani  parat  ? 

A.  Ancilla  sub  umbra  castaneae  cenam  interdum  paraL 

Q.  Ancilla  in  villa  habitat?^ 

A.  Ancilla  in  villa  habitat. 


§  2.  [^Nominalive  Plural.) 

Scaphae  non  procul  a  villa  sunt. 

Feriae  sunt  beatae. 

Beatac  sunt  feriae. 

Magnae  sunt  procellae  in  ora  maritima, 

Nautae  procul  ab  ora  maritima  sunt 

Nautae  in  scapha  sunt. 

Scapha  non  magna  est. 


Where  are  the  boats  ? 

The  boats  are  on  the  sand. 

Sailors  Uve  not  far  from  the  sand  of  the  sea-shore. 

I  sometimes  sail  in  a  boat  with  a  sailor. 

Chains  are  in  the  boat. 

Anchors  and  chains  are  on  the  sea-shore. 


§2  contimied.     {Geniiive  P/nral.) 
Scaphae  nautarum  intcrdum  magnae  sunt. 
Ancorae  scapharum  magnarum  magnae  sunt. 
Ancorae  scapharum  non  magnarum  non  magnae  sunt. 


'  Questions  inay  be  asked  in  conversaiional  Latin,  as  in  English,  simply  by 
chanf^inL;  ihe  tone  of  the  voice,  and  withoul  any  intermgative  ixiriicle  ;  e.g. 
•  vis  pugnare?'  yau  waiit  to  figlit?  (Plautus,  Rudens  lOll).  This  is  very 
common  in  Plautus  and  Terence.  But  it  is  casy  to  introduce  ihe  particle 
'-ne'  to  the  pupil  from  the  first,  if  the  teacher  prefers ;  e.g.  Habitatne 
ancilla  in  villa? 


104  l^RILL   EXERCISES 

The  boats  of  the  sailors  are  not  far  from  the  door  of  thc  counlry 
house. 

The  anchors  of  the  boats  are  on  the  sand. 

The  anchors  and  ihe  chains  of  the  anchors  are  on  the  sand. 

The  inhabitants  of  country-houses  are  not  sailors. 

The  courage  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  sea-shore  is  great. 


§  3.     {Ablative  Plural) 

Scaphae  in  undis  sunt. 

Undae  sub  scaphis  sunt 

In  scaphis  sunt  nautae. 

Procella  est:  undae  non  caeruleae  sunt. 

Nautae  in  undis  non  caeruleis  navigant. 

Nautae  in  casis  albis  habitant. 


Sailors  often  sail  in  boats, 
I  often  sail  with  the  sailors. 

Not  far  from  the  windows  of  the  cottages  are  the  waves  of  the 
sea-sliore. 

My  aunt  is  often^  in  ihe  cottages  of  the  farmers. 
There-is^  a  wood  not  far  from  the  cottages  of  the  farmers. 


§  3   continued.     (^Accusative  Singular  and  Plural  afler  a  Pre- 
position  ) 

Ante  villam  est  arena. 

Ante  casas  nautarum  est  ora  mariiima. 

Ora  mariiima  ])rope  villam  amitae  nieae  est. 

Prope  casas  agricolarum  est  silva. 

Post  cenam  in  scapha  non  uavigo. 

Post  ferias  procul  ab  ora  maritima  habito. 

^  Scc  Rule  2  (Order  of  Words). 

''There-is'  and  'ihere-are'  muit  l)e  translated  simply  by  ihe  verb:  say 
not  far f>om  the  cottagei  is  a  wood. 


DRILL    KXERCISKS  I05 

Bcfore  the  door  of  the  country-house  is  ihe  sand  of  ihe  sca-shore. 

Ncar  the  wood  are  the  cottages  of  ihe  farmers. 

During  the  hohdays  I  sometimes  sail  in  boats. 

After  ihe  hoUdays  I  do  not  stay^  in  the  counlry-house  of  my  aunt. 

Before  the  hoHdays  T  do  not  sail  in  boats. 


§  3  con/ifiued.     {Accusative  Si/^qu/ar  and  Pliiral  depending  on  a 
Verb.) 
Villam  ex  ora  niaritima  specto. 
Fenestras  villae  ex  ora  maritima  specto. 
In  arena  scapham  et  ancoras  et  catenas  specto. 
In  silva  plantas  et  lierbas  specto. 
Plantas  et  herbas  amo  :  bacas  amo. 
Nautae  casas  albas  amant. 
Casae  albae  nautas  delectant. 


I  love  the  sand.^ 

I  love  the  sand  of  the  sea-shore. 

I  love  boats  and  anchors  and  chains 

Waves  dehght  sailors. 

Plants  dehght  my  aunt. 

My  aunt  loves  sailors  and  farmers. 

From  the  windows  of  thc  cottages  the  sailors  see  llie  wuvcs. 

Boats  dehght  sailors  :  sailors  love  boats. 

Before  the  hohdays  I  do  not  see  boats  and  the  sea-shore. 


^  •  I  (/<?  not  stay^  is  an  English  way  of  saying  '  I  stay  not' ;  in  Latin  there 
will  be  only  one  word  for  '  I  do  stay,'  and  the  word  for  '  not '  must  come  before 
it.     (For  '  slay '  say  live.)     Similarly  in  ihe  next  sentcnce  '  I  do  not  sail.' 

-Order  op  Words,  Rulr  3. — Put  the  Accnsative  before  tho  Verb  on 
wbich  it  de^penfls 


105  DRILL   EXERCISES 

Comphte  thc  following  sentences  by  inseriing  a  l^^erb, 

Oram  maritimam  . 

Ora  maritima  nos . 

Scaphas  albas . 

Scaphae  interdum  caeruleae . 

Ora  maritima bella. 


Compkte  the  fflilowing  sentences  by  inserting  a  Freposilion  in  the 
first  place  and  a  Verb  in  the  second. 

arena scaphae. 

oram  maritimam  nautas 

Agricolae silvam . 

nautis  interdum  ■ . 


agricolis  interdum 


After^T^.      Conversation.     {f)\!C\A.  =  what^ 

Q.  Quid  ex  fenestra  spectas  ? 

A.  Ex  fenestra  undas  et  oram  maritimam  specto. 

Q.  Oram  maritimam  amas  ? 

A.  Oram  mariiimam  amo.      Undae  me  delcctant, 

Q.  Silvam  non  amas  ? 

A.  Silvam  amo.      Silva  me  delectat. 

Q.  In  silva  interdum  ambulas  ? 

A.  In  silva  saepe  ambulo. 

Q.  Ubi  est  silva? 

A.  Silva  non  procul  a  villa  est. 

Q.  Quid  est  in  silva  ? 

A.  In  silva  est  copia  plantarum  et  herbarum 

Q.  Bacas  non  amas  ? 

A.  Quantopere  me  bacae  delectant  1 


DRILL   EXERCISES  IO7 

§  4.   (  Vocative  Singiilar  ani  Pliiral.) 

Inter  ferias  te,  ora  maritima,  et  vos,  undae  caeruleae,  saepe 
spccto. 

Vos,  undae  caeruleae,  Britannia  amat. 

Te,  regina  mea,  amo ;  te,  patria  mea,  amo. 

Vos,  incolae  Africae  Meridianae,  regina  insularum  Eriiannic- 
arum  amat. 


I  love  thee,  [0]  Queen  Victoria, 

Victoria  is  queen  not  only  of  ihe  British  islands,  but  also  of 
Canada,  of  Australia,  of  Soulh  Africa, 

I  love  thee,  [0]  South  Africa;  for  (§2)  South  Africa  is  my 
native-land. 

I  love  yoii,  [0]  inhabitants  of  Britain ;  for  Souih  Africa  is  a 
British  colony. 

Great  is  the  glory  of  the  British  colonies. 


§5.  {Daiive  Sifigular.) 

Silva  Lydiae  laetitiam  dat. 

Columbae  Lydiae  laetitiam  dant. 

Lingua  Francogallica  Lydiae  laetitiam  non  dat. 

Tu,  Lydia,  inter  ferias  magistrae  tuae  operam  non  dis. 

Ego  inter  ferias  linguae  Latinae  operam  non  do. 


India  gives  delight  to  the  Quecn  ^  of  the  British  isles. 

But  India  is  not  a  British  colony. 

The  British  colonies  also  give  delight  to  the  British  Qucen. 

Canada  gives  dehght  to  Britain. 

For  Canada  is  a  great  British  colony. 

'Order  ok  Words,  Rule  4. — Pnt  the  Dative  before  the  Accusative. 
(Nole  ihat  ihe  gift  stands  in  the  Accusative,  and  the  person  to  whom  the  gift  i» 
itiade  in  the  Datlve. ) 


loS 


DRILL   EXERCISES 


§  5  continued.     {Dative  Flia-al.) 

Undae  caeruleae  nautis  laetitiam  dant. 

Procellae  nautis  laetitiani  non  dant. 

Plantae  et  herbae  agricolis  laetitiam  dant. 

Agricolae  scaphis  operam  non  dant. 

Inter  ferias  Hnguis  antiquis  operam  non  saepe  do. 


The  Queen  of  Britain  gives  attention  to  the  British  colonies. 
The   British  colonies   give   delight  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
British  isles. 
Sailors  give  attention  to  boats  and  anchors  and  chains. 
My  aunt  gives  atteniion  to  the  cottages  of  the  farmers  and  sailors. 
Lydia  gives  attention  to  doves. 


A/fer  §  5.     {Practice  in  translation  of  English  Frepositions.) 
Make  Latin  sentences  containing  iranslations  of  the  following 

phrases,  and  then  say  which  of  these  English  Preposiiions  are  not 

translated  by  Prepositions  in  Latin. 


in  a  country-house. 

out-of  a  country-house. 

not  far  from  a  country-house. 

to  a  country-house 

{ivith  a  Verb  of  ^ going.') 
of  a  country-house. 
wilh  my  aunt. 

to  my  aunt 

{with  a  Verb  of ' giving.') 

under  a  boat. 

before  supper. 

aftcr  supper. 


in  country-houses. 
out-of  country-houses. 
not  far  from  counlry-houses 
to  country-houses 

i(ivith  a  Verb  of  ^ going.') 
of  country-houses. 
with  my  aunts. 
to  my  aunts 

[with  a  Verb  of^  givin^.') 
under  boats. 
during  the  hohdays. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 


io9 


After  §  5.      Translate  and  learn  the  foUowing  iables  containirig 
fornis  of  Pronouns  hitherto  found. 


SISG  UL  A  R.       PL  URA  L. 

IST     rEKSON.     NOMINAIIVE    CaSK. 

ego 

nos 

ACCUSATIVE    CaSK. 

me 

nos 

2ND    PeRSON.     ] 

S^OMINATIVE    CaSE. 

tu 

VOS 

ACCUSATIVE    CaSE. 

te 

VOS 

NOMINATIVE 

Case  with  Veres. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

iST    Person. 

ego  in  villa  habito. 

nos  in 

villa  habitamus 

2ND    PeRSON. 

tu  in  villa  habitas. 

vos  in 

villa  habitatis. 

3RD   Person. 

amita  niea  in  villa 

amitae 

meae  in  villa 

habitat. 

habitant. 

Accusative  Case  with  Vekus. 


iST    Person. 

2ND    PeRSON. 

3RD  Person. 


SINGULAR. 

amita  mea  me  amat. 
amita  mea  te  amat. 
amita  mea  villam  amat. 


PLURAL. 

amita  mea  nos  amat. 
amita  mea  vos  amat. 
amita  mea  casas  amat. 


After  §  5.      Conversation. 

(^Recapitulation  of  ist  Declension  and  Prescnt  Tcttse  of  '  sum  ' 
and  ist  Coftjugation.)     Q}x\%  =  tvho. 

Q.  Quis  in  villa  nunc  habitat  ? 

A.  Lydia,  consobrina  mea,  in  villa  tmnc  habitat. 

Q.  Tu  quoque  apud  amitam  tuam  nunc  liabitas? 

A.   Ego  quoque  apud  amitam  meam  nunc  habito. 

Q.  Quid  curat  Lydia  ? 

A.  Lydia  columbas  curat. 

Q.  Linguae  FrancogaUicae  operam  dai  ? 

A.  Linguae  FrancogaHicae  operam  non  dat  :  nam  feriae  nunc 
sunt. 

Q.  Tu  hnguae  Latinae  inter  ferias  operam  das  ? 

A.   Linguae  Latinae  intcr  ferias  operam  noii  do. 


IIO  DRILL   EXERCISES 

Q.  Ubi  es  inter  ferias  ? 

A.  Apud  amitam  meam  inter  ferias  sum. 

Q.  Quid  te  inter  ferias  delectat  ? 

A.  Arena,  ora  maritima,  scaphae  me  inter  ferias  delectant 

Q.  In  scaphis  interdum  navigas  ? 

^.  In  scaphis  saepe  navigo. 

Q.  Procellas  non  formidas  ? 

A.  Cum  nauta  navigo. 

Q.  Tu  et  I^ydia  in  silva  interdum  ambulalis? 

A.  In  silva  interdum  ambulamus. 


After  §  5.     [Present  Indicative  of  '  suin.')  ^ 

I  am  an  inhabitant  of  Britain. 

Thou,  [oj  Canada,  art  a  Brilish  colony. 

Canada  is  an  ancient  {aniiqud)  colony  of  Biitain. 

We  are  inhabitants  of  the  British  isles. 

You,  [0]  British  colonies,  are  far  from  the  Briti.-^h  isles. 

There-are  British  colonies  in  Australia. 


After  §5.     {Present  Indicative  of  the  ist  Conjugation.) 

I  now  live  in  my  aunt's  country  house  not  far  from  ihe  sea 
shore. 

You,  Lydia,  now  live  with  my  aunt. 

Your  schoohnistress  lives  far  from  the  sea-shore. 

During  the  hoUdays  we  often  sail  in  boats  :  aiid  wc  do  not  give 
attention  to  the  languages  of  Rome  and  Greece. 

You,  [0]  blue  waves,  now  dehght  us. 

Dnring  the  holidays  the  languages  of  Rome  and  Grcece  do  not 
delight  us. 

iAgreement  of  the  Verb  witii__the  Subject.— The  Verb  must  be 
cf  the  same  Person  and  Number  as  ita  £u'oject  (th.it  is,  llie  person  or 
thing  that  '  does  '  or  '  is '). 


I 


DRILL   EXERCISES  I  I  I 


§6.     {2ni  Dedension  in  -us,  Singular  Number.\ 

Hortus  belliis  est. 

Tu,  horte,  non  niagnus  es. 

riortum  bellum  inter  ferias  saepe  visito. 

Violae  horti  belli  caeruleae  sunt. 

Putruus  meus  horto  bello  aquam  dat. 

In  horto  bello  sunt  rosae. 


My^  uncle  lives  in  a  country-house  near  thc  sea-shore.  1  love 
my  uncle.  I  often  visit  my  uncle's  garden.  I  sometimes  water 
the  roses  and  violets  of  the  garden.  I  often  walk  in  the  garden 
with  Lydia.  Sometimes  I  walk  round  the  wall  of  the  garden  with 
my  uncle.  There  is  a  stream  not  far  from  the  garden.  In  the 
stream  is  an  abundance  of  water.  The  garden  gives  delight  to 
niy  uncle. 


§  7.      {Second  Decknsion  in  -us,  Plural  Num/>er.) 

Mergi  in  ora  maritima  nidificant. 

Vos,  mergi,  in  ora  maritima  nidificatis. 

Mergos  in  ora  maritima  non  capto. 

Cibus  mergorum  in  oceano  est. 

Mergis  inter  ferias  operam  do. 

Corvi  cum  mergis  non  nidificant,  non  vohtant. 


There-is    a   great    number   of    ehns    in    my    uncle's    garden 
Many^  crows  live  in  the  elms.     Sea-guUs  do  not  make-nests  in 


^  Note  that  the  adjectives  in  these  early  exerciscs  (§§  iu)  have  ahvays  the 
same  endings  as  their  Nouns. 

*The  Latin  Adjectives  meaning  'many',  'some',  'all',  '  fcw ',  gencrally 
jtand  be/ore  iheir  Nouns  (not  afler  them,  like  must  Adjectives  ;  see  Kule  I  of 
Order,  p.  loi). 


I  12  DRILL   EXERCISES 

elms.  I  like  to  watch  (say  g/adiy  watcJi)  thc  sea-gulls,  when 
I  am  on  thc  sea-shore.  During  the  holidays  I  sometimes  give 
food  to  the  horses  of  my  uncle's  farm.  Lydia  gives  food  to  the 
cocks  and  hens.  My  uiicle  gives  attention  to  his  farm  and  his 
horses  and  cows  and  pigs.  The  crows  give  dehght  to  niy 
uncle. 


After  §  7.      Conversation. 

Q.  Agellus  patrui  tui  tibi  et  Lydiae  laetitiam  dat  ? 

A.  Agellus  patrui  mei  nos  delectat. 

Q.  Quid  in  agello  est  ? 

A.  In  agello  sunt  equi  et  vaccae  et  porci  et  galli  gallinae- 
que. 

Q.  Quis  equos  et  vaccas  et  porcos  curat  ? 

A.  Ego  equis  interdum  cibum  do  ;  sed  rustici  vaccas  et  porcos 
curant. 

Q.  Quis  gallis  gallinisque  cibum  dat  ? 

A.  Lydia  gallis  gallinisque  cibum  saepe  dat. 

Q.  Ubi  habitant  rustici  ? 

A.  Rustici  in  vico  habitant,  non  procul  ab  agello 


§  8.     {2nd  Deciension  continueJ.) 

The  blue  waves  foam  and  murmur  round  my  uncle's  gardcn. 
I  like  to  watch  (say  giadiy  tvatcii)  the  blue  waves  of  the 
ocean.  I  like  to  walk  to  the  high  clifis  of  the  sea-shore. 
The  lighthouses  of  the  French  coast  (say  s/iore)  are  not  far 
distant.  The  moon  and  stars  often  light-up  the  ocean.  It 
deli,L;hts  me  to  see  the  white  cliffs  and  the  waves.  Boats 
cnrry  sailors  on  the  ocean  ;  sailors  carry  boats  on  the  sand. 


DRTLL    EXERCISES  I  13 

Afler  §8.      Conversation. 

Q.  Quid  tu  et  Lydia  in  horto  patrui  tui  spectatis? 
A.  Non  solum  rosas  et  violas  sed  etiam  corvos  speclamus. 
Q.  Quid  ex  horto  spectaiis? 
A.  Mergos  interdum  ex  horto  spcctamus. 
Q.  Ubi  sunt  nidi  mcrgorum  ? 

A.  Nidi  mergorum  in  scopulis  orae  maritimae  sunt ;    sed  non 
nuUi  ex  mergis  in  insuHs  prope  oram  matitimam  nidificant. 
Q.  Ubi  praedam  suam  captant? 
A.  Praedam  suam  in  oceano  captant. 
Q.  Mergi  interdum  super  agellum  volitant? 
A.  Super  agellum  volitant;  nam  ibi  quoque  cibum  suum  cnptant. 
Q.  Quid  ex  scopulis  orae  maritimae  spcctatis  ? 
A.  Ex  scopulis  pharos  orae  Francogallicae  spectamus. 


§9.     {2nd  Decknsion  in -iim.) 

Oppidum  antiquum  in  Cantio  esL 

Te,  oppidum  antiquum,  amo. 

Oppiduni  antiquum  inter  ferias  intcrdum  visito. 

Fundamenla  oppidi  antiqui  magna  scd  non  alta  sunt. 

Oppido  antiquo  inter  ferias  operam  do. 

In  oppido  antiquo  niimmi  Romani  suiit. 

Oppida  anti^iua  me  delectant. 

Vos,  oppida  antiqua,  amo. 

Oppida  antiqua  libenter  visito. 

Aedificia  oppidorum  antiquorum  interduni  Roniana  snnt. 

Oppidis  antiquis  libenter  oi^eram  do. 

In  opijidis  anliciuis  nummi  Britannici  intcrdum  sunt. 


Where  is  Kent?  Kent  is  in  South  Britain.  The  coast  (say 
ihore)  of  Kent  is  not  far  from  the  French  coast.  My  uncle's  farm 
is  in  Kent.      Dover  and  Richborough  are  not  far  from  my  unclc's 

8 


114  DRILL   EXERCISES 

farm.  There-are  traces  of  a  Roman  amphitheatre  near  Rich- 
borough.  London  also  is  an  ancient  town.  London  is  not  far 
distant  from  Kent.  There-are  many  ancient  towns  on  British 
soil.     In  Britain  \ve  often  see  the  foundations  of  Ronian  buildings. 


After  §9.      Conversation, 
Q.  Ubi  habitant  patruus  tuus  et  amita  tua? 
A.  In  Cantio  habitant,  inter  Dubras  et  Rutupias. 
Q.  Quid  in  Cantio  spectas  ? 

A.   [Here  niay  be   introduced  all  the  Noinis   hitherto   learned, 
Singular  or  Plural  Number.) 


§10.     {2nd  Declension  in -um  continued.)  • 

I  often  see  the  ancient  castle,  when  I  visit  Dover.  The  castle 
is  on  the  cliffs,  near  the  sea-shore.  The  walls  of  the  castle  are  not 
ancient ;  but  there  are  relics  of  ancient  buildings  in  the  castle. 
At-the-present-day  there-is  a  church  near  the  relics  of  the  ancient 
buildings.  The  church  also  is  ancient  ;  for  it  was  a  consecrated 
building  in  the  second  century  after  the  birih  of  Christ  (say  a/ter 
Christ  born.) 

§  1 1.     {2nd  Declension  in  -um  continued.) 

From  the  windows  of  the  castle  we  see  many  vessels.  There- 
are  many  vessels  in  the  Enghsh  Channel.  Many  vessels  sail 
round  Britain.  I  see  the  flags  of  British  and  French  vessels. 
But  where  are  the  German  and  Belgian  vessels?  I  do  not  now 
oee  German  and  Belgian  vessels  in  the  En;^lish  Channel.  But 
many  German  and  Belgian  vessels  sail  to  Britain.^ 


*  Imitate  itt  .Africam  Meridianam,     So,  too,  in  future  exercises  when  going 
or  sailing  to  a  Coiintry  is  spoken  ofi 


DRILL   EXERCISES  115 

A/ier  %  II.      Conversation. 

Q.  Dubras  et  Rutupias  interdum  visitas  P 

A.  Dubras  saepe  visito. 

Q.  Quid  ibi  spectas? 

A.  Castellum  antiquum  ibi  specto. 

Q.  Quid  in  castello  spectas  ? 

A.  In  castello  speculam  antiquam  specto. 

Q.  Quid  ex  castello  spectas  ? 

A.  Ex  castello  fretum  Gallicum  et  clivos  gramlnec-^  spccto. 

Q.  Quid  in  freto  Gallico  spectas? 

A.  In  freto  Gallico  navigia  specto. 

Q.  Navigia  libenter  spectas  ? 

A.   NonnuUa  ex  navigiis  in  patriam  mcam  navigan^. 

§  12.     {2nd  Dechnsion  in  -er.) 

Puer  Marcus  condiscipulus  meus  est. 

Tu,  puer  Marce,  mihi  praecipuus  amicus  es. 

Puerum  Marcum  saepe  visito. 

Pueri  Marci  patria  est  Caledonia. 

Puero  Marco  feriae  magnam  laetitiam  dant. 

Cum  puero  Marco  saepe  nato. 

Duo  pueri  prope  Dubras  habitant. 

Vos,  pueri,  condiscipuli  mei  estis. 

Pueros,  condiscipulos  nieos,  pilae  delectant. 

Patria  puerorum  procul  a  Cantio  est. 

Pueris  ludi  in  arena  laetitiam  dant. 

Cum  pueris  intenlum  in  scapha  navigo. 


Two  boys  are  my  friends.  They  live  in  Kent,  but  Scotl.Tnd  is 
the  native-land  of  the  boys.  The  boys  are  my  schoolfellows.  I 
often  visit  the  boys  during  the  hohdays.  Sometimes  I  swim  with 
the  boys  in  the  blue  waves.  How  much  it  delights  us  boys  to  see 
the  great  waves ! 


Il6  DKILL   EXERCISES 

§  13.      [jnd  Declension  i;i  -er  continued.) 

Diiring  tlie  holidays  a  boy  does  not  pay  attention  to  lessons. 
The  ancient  languages  of  Greece  and  Ronie  do  not  dclight  a  boy 
during  the  holidays.  There-are  many  aniusements  of  a  boy  when 
he  is  free  ^  from  lessons.  Games  of  ball  give  great  delight  to  a 
boy,  not  only  during  the  hoHdays  but  also  when  he  is  not  ^  free 
from  lessons. 

Peter  is  a  sailor.  I  Hke  Peter.  Peter's  boat  is  a  source  (§9)^ 
not  only  of  amusement  but  also  of  gain  to  Peter. 


A/ter  %^^:      Cotiversation.       {QviOt  =  ho7V  fnany.) 

Q.  Quot  tibi  amici  sunt? 

A.   Duo  milii  sunt  amici. 

Q.  Ubi  habitant  amici  tui  ? 

A.  Prope  Dubras  nunc  habitant  amici  mei. 

Q.  Pueros  interdum  visitas  ? 

A.  Pueros  saepe  visito. 

Q.  Quid  vos  pueros  inter  ferias  delectat  ? 

A.  Ludi  pilarum,  castella  in  arena  aedificarc,  in  undis  natarc, 
in  scaphis  navigare  nos  delectant. 

Q.  Undas  spumiferas  non  formidatis? 

A.  Undas  non  formidamus. 

Q.  Vos  pueri  interdum  remigatis? 

A.  Interdum  remigamus,  cum  undae  non  nimis  asperae  sunt. 

Q.  Quis  rcmigat  cum  undae  asperae  sunt? 

A.  Cuni  undae  nimis  asperae  sunt,  Petrus  remigat  vel  velis 
rninistrat. 

^The  Adjective  used  with  the  Verb  '  to  be '  must  be  in  the  same  Case  and 
Number  as  the  Subjccl  of  which  it  is  s.iid  ;  thus  here  'free'  niust  be  Nominalive 
Singular,  because  '  hc  '  is  Nominative  Singular. 

''See  Order  of  Words,  Rule  2.  llere  'not'  negatives  'free'  and  must 
therefore  stand  immcdiately  before  it. 

*  Where  a  number  is  quolcd  like  this  in  brackets,  it  mcans  that  the  word 
required  can  be  found  in  a  certain  secMon  of  the  Preparations. 


DRILL   EXERCISES  II7 

^  14.   {2nd  Decktision  continued:   'vir'.) 

'riiere  is  a  nobleman^  nientioned  in  a  play^.  The  nobleman's 
life  is  unhappy.  The  man  has^  two  sons.  The  son  Edgar* 
is  faithful.  But  the  son  Edniund*  does  not  love  the  nobleman. 
The  nobleman  prepares  to  hurl  himself  down-from  a  cliff. 
The  chff  is  near  Dover.  But  the  failhful  son  walks  to  the  cliff 
with  the  nobleman,  and  saves  the  life  of  the  unhappy  man. 


After  §  14. 

1.  Write  t7vo  sentences  about  the  things  seen  ifi  Kent  during  the 
holidaxs.     Jn  the  first  sentence  say   'During   the   holidays   I   see 

.   .   .  .' ;  in  the  second  sentence  say  '  How  much  it  delights  me  to 
see  .   .  .  .  '  {and  here  put  in  the  things  that  you  like  best  to  see). 

2.  Repeat  ihe  table  0/  Pronouns  giveti  after  §  5,  and  add  the 
Dative  Cases,  Singular  and  Plural  (mihi,  tibi,  nobis,  vobis). 
JiJake  up  sentences  conlaining  ihese  Datives. 


%  15.   {2nd  Declension  in    er  continued.) 

Magister  noster  vir  doctus  est. 

Tu,  magister,  mihi  carus  es, 

Magistrum  nostrum  amo. 

Libri  magistri  nostri  pulchri  sunt. 

Libri  magistro  nostro  magnam  laetitiam  dant. 

Cum  magistro  nostro  saep?  ambulamus. 

Magistri  nostri  viri  docti  sunl. 

Vos,  magistri,  pueris  pigris  non  cari  estis. 

Ma_j;istros  multi  pueri  formidant. 

*  Note  thal  the  Adjective  in  this  ca«e  has  not  the  same  cnding  a=  the  Noun; 
so,  t,io,  often  in  the  foilowing  exeicises. 

'  Say  itt  a  play  iiuniiorted;  see  Order  of  \Vord>,  Ruic  2. 

'  Say  to  the  mun  there-are  ;  see  Pre/>aiatii>iis,  §  9,  end  (palruo  meo  est). 

*  Tliese  English  names  may  be  latinized  as  Edgarut,  Edinundus. 


Il8  DRILL   EXERCISES 

Libri  magistrorum  nostrorum  docti  sunt. 

Magistris  nostris  copia  librorum  est. 

Cum  magistris  nostris  ludis  saepe  operam  damus. 


I  often  see  our  schoolmaster  during  the  holidays.  Our  school- 
masler  has^  many  books  about  (§  lo)  Britain.  We  boys  like  to 
see^  the  books  of  our  schoohnaster.  The  schoolmaster's  books 
are  filled^  with  Roman  and  Greek  coins.  I  am  a  schoolfelluw  of 
Mark  and  Alexander  in  a  famous  and  ancient  schook  Not  only 
the  boys  but  also  the  masters  of  our  school  pay  atteniion  to  games. 


§  i6.   {Agreement  of  Adjectives.) 


villa  Romana  oppidum  Romanura 

fagus  Britamiica 


nummus  Romanus 
vir  doctus 
hber  Latinus 
nauta  Romanus 

RuLE. — Make  the  Adjective  agree  with  its  Noun  in  Gender^ 
as  well  as  in  Number  and  Case. 

This  rule  appHes  not  only  to  examples  hke  those  above,  in 
which  the  Adjective  is  called  an  Attribute  of  the  Noun,  but  also 
to  examples  Hke  the  foUowing,  in  which  the  Adjective  is  uscd  with 
the  Verb  *  to  be '  and  is  called  a  Predicate  Adjective : 
nummus  est  Romanus.      villa  est  Romana. 
vir  est  doctus.  fagus  est  Britannica. 


oppidum  est 
Romanum. 


*  Say  to  our  schoohnaster  there-are  ;  see  Preparations  §9,  end.  Similarly 
in  all  future  scntences  where  ihe  verb  '  to  have '  occurs  in  this  book. 

^  llere  and  in  all  future  sentences  whcre  '  like  to '  occurs  say  'gladly 

'  Use  creber,  and  rcmember  the  riile  for  the  Case  and  Number  of  Adjectives 
used  wilh  the  vcrb  '  to  be '  given  on  g  13  ('  he  is  free'). 

*  For  Rules  of  Gender  see  Prcparations  §  15  (p.  75). — Note  that  the  ending 
of  ihe  Adjective  is  not  always  the  same  as  that  of  the  Noun  (sis  it  was  in  the 
cxercises  on  §§  i-il). 


DRILL   EXERCISES  119 

A  learned  teacher  is  sometimes  not  dcar  to  hoys.  Our  teacher 
is  learned.  Boys  are  not  learncd.  My  aunt  is  not  learncd.  15ut 
we  boys  love  our  teacher.  And  my  aunt  likes  to  hsten  when  a 
learned  man  tells  about  the  ancient  P>ritons.  There-were^  great 
forests  in  ancient  Britain.  But  thcre-were  not  many  beeches  in 
the  British  forests.  So  Gaius  JuUus  afifirms.  There  were  niany 
wolves  and  bears  in  the  great  forests  of  ancient  Britain. 


§  17.   {Agfyement.o/  AJjectives  co?itinued.) 

Were  the  Roman  sailors  lazy?  Gaius  Juhus  does  not  blame 
(§  14)  tlie  Roman  sailors.  He  praises'^  the  courage  of  his  sailors. 
Roman  farmers  were  active,  as  a  Roman  poet  affirms.  There  were 
niany  Roman  sailors  (say  tfiany  sailors  Roman')  on  the  vessels  of 
Gaius^  Julius.  Roman  vessels  were-able  to  sail  to  Britain  and 
round  the  British  coast.  The  rains  of  Britain  were  hideous  then/ 
as  they  are  now.*  The  small  pearls  of  the  British  ocean  were 
mostly  (§  13)  dark  or  blue. 


§  18.  {Past  Jm-perfect  Indicative  0/^  sum'  and  the  ist  Conjuga- 
tion.) 

Proximo  anno  in  Cantio  eram. 
Proximo  anno  in  Cantio  eras. 
Proxiino  anno  in  Cantio  erat. 
Proximo  anno  in  Cantio  eramus. 
Proximo  anno  in  Cantio  eratis. 
Proximo  anno  in  Cantio  erant. 


*  The  only  forms  of  ihe  ['ai^t   Iiii|jerrect  needcil  fur  this  and  the  foUowing 
exercise  ar«  those  which  luwe  actually  occurred  in  ihe  lext  of  the  slory. 

"  Use  the  verb  laudu,  '  I  piaise  '  {Preparatiotis  §  13). 
"  (jaius  forms  Gen.   Gai,  Dat.  Gai5. 

*  Remember  that  '  then  '  and  '  now  '  are  Adverbs. 


120  DklLL   EXERCISES 

Multa  aedificia  antiqua  spectabam. 
Multa  aedilicia  antiqua  speciabas. 
Multa  aedificia  antiqua  spectabat. 
Multa  aedificia  antiqua  spectabamus. 
Multa  aedificia  antiqua  spectabatis. 
Multa  aedificia  aniiqua  spectabant. 


Tlie  large  vessels  of  British  sailors  are  mostly  (§  13)  black  ;  but 
the  little  boats  are  sometimes  white,  sometimes  blue,  sometimes 
yellow.  Last  year,  while  (§  16)  I  was  in  Kent,  I  used-to-see  many 
British  sailors.  They  were  all  sun-burnt.  Some^  of  the  sailors 
used-to-taitoo  (say  colour)  their  Umbs.  The  clothes  of  British 
and  French  sailors  are  blue.  British  sailors  mosily  have  sturdy 
hmbs  and  a  great  stature.  Our  sailors  sail  round  the  coasts  of  all 
lands,  as  the  Roman  sailors  used-to-sail  round  the  coasts  of  the 
Mediterranean.^     A  British  sailor  does  not  fear  storms. 


§  19.  {^Adjedives  and  Past  Imperfect  Indicative  continued^ 
Werc  all  the  inhabitants  of  ancient  Britain  Celts?  I  think  not.^ 
Some  of  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  our  island  were  not  barbarous. 
The  inhabitants  of  Kent  were  mo>.tly  farmers,  as  they  are  now.* 
Many  of  the  inhabitants  of  Kent  were  Belgians  (§  15).  Were  not 
the  Bclgians  a  German  tribe  (§  18)  ?  Does  not  Gaius  Juhus  so 
affirm  in  his  book  about  the  Gallic  war  ?  The  German  tribes  were 
moderately  civiUzed,  but  the  ancient  Cclts  of  Britain  were  not 
civilized. 


'The  word  for  'some'  tnust  stand  in  the  Noininalive  Case  and  be  Masculine 
Plural,  because  '  some  of  the  sailors  '  means  '  some  iailors  of  l)ie  sailors'  ;  see 
the  example  in  §  1 1  of  the  siory. 

*  Say  '  ihe  .Mediterraneaa  ocean.'  '  .Mediierranean  '  is  an  A  Ijective,  mean- 
ing  '  Mid-land,'  and  is  in  Latin  Mtditifraneus  (a,ui/i). 

*  A  very  conimon  way  of  saying  '  I  ihink  not,'  '  I  hope  not,"  and  so  forlh  in 
Latin  is  '  I  do  not  think,'  '  I  do  not  hope,'  etc 

*  Remember  that  '  now  '  is  an  Adverb. 


DRILL    EXERCISES  121 

§  20.  [So/ne  uses  of  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition  :  sce 
sunnnary  of  these  uses  at  the  eiid  of  frefarations  §  20.)  ' 

{A.)  In  ihe  second  century  before  ihe  birth  of  Christ^  Britain 
was  free.  The  boys  and  girls  (§  15)  of  the  uncivilized  Britons 
were  free  from  lessons.  The  savage  (§  18)  Britons  togetlier  with 
their  sons  used-to-kill  stags  and  wild-boars  in  the  woods  with 
S])ears  and  arrows.  They  used-to-catch  (§  7)  wild-beasts  with 
hunting  dogs  (§  19)  for  the  sake  of  food. 

{B.)  The  civiHzed  Britons  used-to-adorn^  their  Unibs  with 
golden  chains  and  with  precious-stones  (§  19).  By  nieans  of  the 
vcssels  of  the  Veneti  they  used-to-export  corn  to  Gaul.  The 
Druids  were  the  teachers  of  the  childrcn  of  the  civilized  Britons. 
The  Romans  used  not  to  fight  with  chariots.  They  used-to-fight 
wilh  barbarous  tribes  for  the  sake  of  victory  and  gain  (§  9).  They 
used  often  to  kiU  their  ca[)tives ;  but  sometimes  they  used  to  seU 
the  captives  at  a  great  price  (§  9). 


^NoTEON  THE  AuLATiVE  wiTHOUT  A  Prkposition.  The  foUowing 
English  Picposilions  are  to  be  Iranslatecl  by  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition 
in  certain  cases. 

*  Froni,'  when  it  comes  after  'free'  (liber,  §12)  and  'I  am  free '  {vaco,  §6). 

'In'  or  'At,'  when  it  comes  befure  a  Noun  denoling  timj,  as  'in  ihe  second 
ceniury,'  secundo  saeculo  (§10),  'at  what  o'clock?'  quold  hora'i  (%2.\).  Also 
bcfore  a  Koun  oenoling  price  or  value,  as  'at  a  great  price,'  tita^no pretio  (§9). 

'  With,'  when  it  mcans  '  by  means  of,'  or  fornis  a  phrase  answering  ihe 
question  'how?':  as  'they  used  to  fight  with  spears  and  arrows,'  hastis  et 
sagiltis  pugnabant  (§18),  '  they  used  to  fight  with  great  courage,'  inagna 
audacii  pugnabant ;  '  hideous  with  ra.\x\%,'  fluviis  foedum  (§17);  '  fiUed  with 
victims,'  victitnis  plena  (§20)  ;   '  crowded  with  children,'  liberis  creber  (§  15). 

'  By  nicans  of '  is  generaliy  to  be  translated  by  thc  Ablative  alonc. 

[A  fuller  account  of  how  to  translate  Englibh  Prepo^itions  is  given  at  the 
cnd  of  this  book.] 

"^  Here  and  in  future  exeiciscs  where  Ihe  phrase  '  before  the  biuh  of  Chrisi' 
occurs,  say  before  Christ  born. 

'  Use  the  verb  orno,  I  adorn,  I  ornamcnt. 


122  DRILL    EXERCISES 

§2  1.      [Sonie  fo>-/iis  of  tlie  Future  Indicative.Y 

How  I  shall  like  -  to  walk  to  the  place  where  the  battle  was  i 
Where  will  the  place  be?  The  place  will  be  on  the  coast  of  Kent, 
between  Do\Jer  and  Richborough.  The  road  will  be  long,  but  it 
will  be  very-pleasing  to  us  to  see  the  place.  You,  Mark  and 
Alexander,  will  walk  with  me  and  with  niy  uncle  to  the  place. 


§2  2.     {Future  Indicative  atid  Imperative  of   ^  suin'    and    jst 
Conjtigation.) 

Locum  cras  spectabo,  si  caehu^  serenum  crit. 
Tu,  Marce,  locum  spectabis,  si  caehmi  sereiuun  erit. 
Alexander  locum  spectabit,  si  caelum  serenum  erit. 
Universi  locum  spectabimus,  si  caelum  serenum  erit. 
Vos,  amita  mea  et  Lydia,  locum  non  spectabitis. 
Amita  mea  et  Lydia  locum  non  spectabunt. 

Specta,  Marce ! 
Spectate,  pueri  ! 


If  the  sky  is^  clear,  we  shall-be-able  to  see  the  place  where  the 
Roman  vessels  were.  My  uncle  will  show  us*  the  place.  At  what 
oclock  shall  we  arrive?  You,  Mark  and  Alexander,  will  dine  with 
us  when  it  is^  evening.  We  shall  carry  our  lunch  wiih  us.  The 
cakes  and  apples  will  give  us  *  great  dehght.  "Show  me  *  the 
tombs,"  says  Alcxander.     Alexander  is  a  httle  boy.     "  Not  loo 

^The  only  forms  needed  for  this  exercke  are  those  whioh  have  aciually 
occurred  in  §21  of  the  slory. 

-See  note  2  on  p.  Ii8. 

^S&y  s/ia/i  ie.  The  Future  Tense  often  means  '  sliall'  as  well  as  '  will' 
in  ihc  2nd  and  3rd  Persons,  especially  in  suburdinale  clauses.  Sonictimcs 
it  means  '  will '  in  the  ist  Person. 

■•Whnl  Preposilion  miglit  Le  used  before  the  Pronoun  in  EngUsh  ?  Think 
of  the  meaning.  This  Preposilion  after  a  vcrb  of  '  showing '  is  translated  in 
the  samc  way  as  after  a  verb  of  '  givins;.' 


DRILL    EXERCISES  123 

fast !  (say  hurry'  slo7ii/y)"  says  my  uncle.  "  Give  attention,  boys," 
says  niy  aunl,  "'we  shall  dine  at  the  eleventh  hour.  I  shall  praise 
(§  13)  yo*^)  if  you  arrive^  before  the  eleventh  hour.  You  will  not 
arrive  after  the  eleventh  hour,  as  I  hope."  "  I  hope  not,""^  says 
my  uncle. 

§  23.  [Future  Indicative  and  Tmperative  contifiued.) 
\Ve  shall  start  (say  give  ourselves  to  the  road)  at  the  fifth  hour. 
We  shall  not  walk  quickly.  For  Alexander  will  be  tired  if  we 
walk  3  too  (§  1 2)  quickly.  What  o'clock  will  it  be  when  we 
aiii\c?*  Will  you  be  tired,  Alexander,  if  we  ariive*  at  thc  tenth 
hour?  "I  shall  not  be  tired  "  says  Alexander.  "  You  will  not 
wu!k  too  quickly,  as  I  hope,"  says  my  aunt,  "  for  Alexander  is  a 
litlle  boy."  "Not  too  fiist  !  (say  hurry  slowly)"  says  Lydia; 
"Alexander  will  be  hungry  before  the  tenih  hour.  Cairy  an 
apple  with  you,  Alexander  ! "  "I  shall  not  be  hungry,"  says 
Alexander.  "Give  me  the  cakes,"  says  my  uncle.  "Good-bye" 
says  my  aunt ;  "arrive  in-good-time  (say  (7//^r/««<f/>')." 


§  24.     {Ferfect  Indicative  of '  sum  '  and  ist  Conjugation.) 
Fractice  in  all  persons  of  the  Singular  and  Flural  the  sentence: 
Locum  spectavi  quo  Gaius  luHus  navigia  sua  applicavit. 

The  sky  was  clear  when  we  walked  to  the  place  where  Gaius 
JuUus  fought  with  the  Britons.  In  the  year  55  B.C.*  he  built 
vessels  in  Gaul  and  sailed  from  the  GalHc  coast  to  the  coast  of 
Kent.     He  brought  his  vessels  to  land  between  Dover  and  Rich- 

^  Say  skall  arrive. 

*  See  note  3  on  p.  120, 

-  Use  the  Future  Tense,  as  in  Ex.  §22,  p.  122. 

*  Say  in  the  fifty-fifth  year  before  Chrisl  born  ;  and  siniilarly  in  all  future 
senlences  when  the  phrase  '  B.C  or  '  A.D.'  (Anno  Domini)  occurs,  say  before 
Christ  born  or  nfter  Christ  bot  n. 


]J4  DKILL   EXERCISES 

borough,  as  leamed  men  have  gcnerally  [mostly,  §  13)  affirmed.  The 
Britons  were  prepared  (§21),  aiid  ihey  hasteiied  to  the  place.  My 
uncle  has  often  seen  the  place,  but  we  boys  have  never  been  there. 

§  25.     {Pliiperfect  Indicative  0/  '  stim  '  and  ist  Conjugation). 
Practice  in  all persons  of  the  Singular  and  Plural  the  sentence  : 
Ad  locum  adventaveram  quo  Gaius  luhus  navigia  sua  appUcavit. 


When  Gaius  Julius  anchored  ^  his  vessels  near  the  British 
coast,  the  Britons  had  already  gathered  themselves  together  on  ihe 
cUffs.  "  We  Britons  wiU  never  be  slaves  (§19)"  they  say  (§  21). 
They  had  hastened  along  the  sea-shore  and  had  prepared  them- 
selves  for  battle  (§24).  iloman  forces  had  never  before  sailed  to 
our  island.  But  GaUic  vessels  had  often  sailed  to  Britain  for  the 
sake  of  commerce.  Gaius  JuUus  had  never  before  been  in  Britain. 
But  he  had  waged-war  (§  24)  against  the  inhabitants  of  the  neigh- 
bouring  coast.  The  Gauls  (§  19)  had  told  Gaius  JuUus^  many- 
things  about  Britain. 

§  26.     {Future  Present  Indicative  of  '  sum  '  and  ist  Conjugation.) 
Practice  in  all persons  (f  the  Singular  and  Plural  the  sentence  : 
Cum  aUerum  pomum  gustavero,  in  viam  me  dabo. 

"  When^  shaU  we-have  arrived  home*?  "  says  Alexander.  "  My 
aunt  wiU  not  praise  (§13)  us"  say  I  (§21)  " if  we  arrive*  late 
(§23)."       "We  shaU  have  arrived  before  the  eleventh  hour,"  says 

^  Where  the  phrase  '  to  anchor '  oecurs,  say  '  to  fasten  to  anchors,'  as  in  the 
story. 

'^What  Preposition  might  be  put  in  before  '  Gaius  Juhus'  in  English  ? 
Compare  Ex.  22,  note  4  (p.  122). 

*  What  is  the  word  for  '  when  '  in  a  question  ? 

*  Use  ihe  word  ihat  properly  means  '  homewards' :  for  the  Romans  always 
spoke  of  arriving  '  lo  a  place  '  (not  '  at  a  place.') 

»  Use  the  Futurp  Prrfert  Ten-se  (shall  have ). 


DRILL   EXERCISES  125 

my  uncle,  "unless  (§25)  ihere-is^  rain  (§17).  If  the  sky  is*  clear, 
we  shall  not  arrive  late,  as  I  hope."  "IJnless  you,  Alexander, 
walk^  quickly,"  says  Mark,  "  there  will  be  deiay."  "  When 
shall  we  visit  Richborough  ?  "  say  I.  "  If  you  visit  ^  me  next  year 
(j>roximo  anno)"  says  my  uncle  "  I  will  walk  with  you  to  Rich- 
borough,^  and  I  will  show  vou  the  ruins  of  the  castle  belonging- 
to-Richborough  (§21)." 


After  §  26.     {On  Adjectives  in  -atus,  a,  uin). 

A.   Translate  and  compare  the  following  exampks  of  Adkctives  in 
-atus,  -a,  -um,  ivJiich  have  occurred  in  ihe  story. 
Aedificium  consecratum  (§10). 
Nonnulla  navigia  Castella  r\ominata  sunt  (§  i  i)' 
Locus  in  fabula  commemoratus  est  (§  14^ 
Urnae  pulchre  ornatae  (§20). 
Quota  hora  parati  eritis?  (§21). 
Non  fatigatus  sum  (§23). 
Copiae  armatae  (§  24). 
Quando  satiatus  eris  ?  (§  26). 

All  these  Adjectives  are  formed  from  Verbs,  like  tke  Eng/ish 
Adjectivcs  in  -ed  or -n  formed  from  Verbs.  Adjectives  formed  from 
Verbs  are  generally  called  ^  Participles,'  and  they  may  be  used,  like 
other  Adjectives,  either  to  qualify  Nouns  or  with  tJie  Verb  ^ to  be' 
(see  examples  above).  IVhen  they  are  used tvith  tJie  Verb  ^  to  be'  tJiey 
form  certain  tenses  of  tJu  ^  Passive  Voice,'  as  in  EnglisJi. 


'  Use  the  Future  Perfect  Tcnse  (shalt  have ). 

^  Imitate  the  way  of  saying  '  to  Dover '  given  in  §  24  of  the  story,  and  see 
also  ihe  rule  given  in  Prepnralions  §22.  The  case  used  to  express  'lo'  and 
'from'  with  the  name  of  a  Town  is  ihe  same  as  if  ihe  Preposilions  wt  and  ah 
were  uscd. 


126  DRILL   EXEKCISES 

B.    Translate  i?ito  Latin. 

I  am  not  satisfied. 

Are  you  fatigued,  Alexander  ? 

The  um  is  beautifully  adorned. 

I  have  seen  an  urn  beautifully  adorned. 

The  Britons  were  armed  with  spears  and  arrows. 

The  Brilnns  were  prepared  for  (cf.  §  24)  battle. 

We  wer»»  prepared  for  lunch. 

The  building  was  already  consecrated  in  the  second  century, 

The  Romap  vessels  were  already  fastened  to  anchors  (§  24) 

The  Britons  were  gathered-together  on  the  sea  shore  (§  25) 


After  §  26.  {On  Adjectives  in  -andus^  a,  um,  and  Nouns  iu 
-a7idum)} 

Translate  in  the  ivay  indicated  in  the  Preparations  (§§25,  24,  23) 
the  folloiving  sentences  containing  Adjectives  in  -andus,  a,  um  : — 

Audacia  aquihferi  erat    laudanda  [Jaud-able  or  praise-worthy, 

§25). 

Audacia  laudanda  aquiliferi  Romanos  servavit. 

Magister  noster  est  amandus  {ami-able  or  lov-able  or  worthy-to-he- 
lored). 

Amita  mea  est  amanda. 

Amita  mea  amanda  in  Cantio  habitat. 

Scopuli  Cantii  sunt  spectandi  {jvorthy-tobe-secn  or  simply  to-be- 
seen). 

Scopulos  spectandos  Cantii  saepe  visitavi. 

Navigia  ad  scopulos  non  sunt  appliranda  {to-be-brought-to- 
land). 


*  Tlie  iises  of  the  Adjoctivcs  in  -andus,  a,  uni,  and   Noiins  in   -anduin  wilJ 
be  more  fuUy  explaincd  hcie.ifter  (al  the  end  of  ihe  Exercises). 


DRILL   EXERCISES  12/ 

Locus  non  idoneus  est  ad  navigia  applicanda  {for  vcssels  io-be- 
broi4ght-to-land,  §  34).^ 

Locus  idoneus  erat  ad  copias  explicandas  {for  forces  to-be- 
deployed,  §25). 


Translate  ihe  following  sentences  containing  Noiins  in  -andiem: — 

Paratus  sum  ad  ambulandum  {for  walking,  §23). 

Parati  sumus  ad  remigandum  {cf.  remigo,  I  row). 

Cupidi  {desirous)  sumus  remigandi  (Gen.  Case  of 'remigandum.') 

Cupidi  eramus  visitandi  locum  ubi  proelium  erat. 

Cupidus  sum  ambulandi  ad  locum. 

Ad  locum  ambulandi  cupidus  sum. 


§  27.  {Sfd  Declension. — Masculines  and  Feminines  thnt  form  t/ie 
Nominative  Singular  without  adding  -s). 

{A).  C.  Julius  Caesar  was  a  famous  {c/arus,  §  15)  general  of  the 
Romnns  in  the  first  century  B.C.  Great  was  the  glory  (§4)  of  C. 
Julius  Caesar.  The  Gauls  feared  (§  2  ;  say  used-io-fear)  Caesar. 
For  within  (§22)  three  years  he  had  defeated  (§24)  the  Helvetii^ 
in  South  Gaul  and  the  Veneli  on  the  Gallic  coast  and  the  tribes 
of  Belgic  Gaul.  Tliere-were  niany  Caesars  before  and  after  C. 
Julius  Caesar.  The  Romans  used-to-name^  the  Caesars  *  Generals.' 
The  forces  of  the  Caesars  were  great.  My  uncle  has  told  me 
many-things  about  the  Caesars. 


'Compare  in  English  such  sentences  as  '  It  is  time  for  Ihc  dinner  to  1)0  got 
ready,'  '  I  am  eagcr  for  the  dinner  to  be  got  ready,'  '  Ring  the  bell  (or  the 
dinner  to  be  cleared  away,'  etc. 

^  Helvetii,  the  plural  of  Helvetius,  is  a  noun  of  the  2nd  Declension.  The 
llelvelii  lived  in  Helvetia  (Swilzerland). 

'Use  itouii>io  'I  name,'  from  which  comes  the  Adjective  nominaius,  a,  um 
'namcd'  (§11). 


1^6  DRILL   EXERCISES 

(B).  Wh)-  did  Caesar  wage-war  against  Britain?  The  cause  (§9) 
of  the  expedilion  against  Britain  is  known  (§16).  During  the 
war  with  the  Veneti  some  of  the  tribes  ^  of  Britain  had  suppHed 
auxih'aries  to^  the  Veneli.  For  the  Veneti  had  been  friends  of  tiie 
tribes  of  South  Britain  during  niany  years.  There  had  also  been 
war  between  the  tribes  of  Soulh  Britain.  And  the  Trinobantes 
were  friends  of  the  Romans.  Accordingly  (§  19)  Caesar  prepared 
to  supply  aid  to  the  Trinobantes  against  the  Cassi. 


§  28.     (Same  Nouns  co/ttinued.) 

Caesar's  first  expedition  was  not  great ;  but  in  the  second 
expedition  of  the  next  year  a  great  multitude  of  vessels  and  five 
legions  sailed  with  Caesar  to  Britain.  How-many^  mcn  were-there 
in  a  Roman  legion  ?  How-many  men  were-there  in  five  Roman 
legions  ?  The  number  was  different  (§19)  in  different  centuries. 
Among*  Caesar's  forces  were  also  many  Galhc  auxiharies.  For 
the  Belgae  and  other  Galhc  tribes  had  supphed  forces  to  Caesar. 
Many  Caesars  were  warUke.  In  the  first  century  A.  D.  one  (§22) 
of  the  Caesars  named  Claudius  was  the  second  conqueror  {viitor) 
of  Britain.  I  do  not  Jove  the  Caesars ;  but  C.  Juhus  Caesar  was 
a  great  man  and  a  great  gcneral. 


§  29.  {jfcl  Dedension. — Masculines  and  Feminines  tliat  fonn 
the  Noviinative  Singiilar  by  adding  s.) 

A.  The;  e  had  been  peace  between  the  Romans  and  the  Britons 
after  the  first  expedition  of  Caesar.  It  was  not  necessary  for 
Caesar  (§24)  to  wage-war  a  seco-id-time  against  the  free  tdbes  of 

'Translate  'tribe'  hy  itatio  (instead  of  />o/utus)  in  ihis  and  all  following 
exercises. 

^The  verb  '  to  supply  '  is  a  verb  of  'givinij.'  How,  ihen,  is  to  the  Veixmi 
to  be  translated  ? 

*'  How-many'  is  (^m^/ "(indeclinable  ;  see  Latin  Driil  §  13). 

*  Say  ///  the  nuiuber  o/. 


DRILL   EXERCISES  I29 

Britain.  But  he  was  desirous  of  glory  and  booty.  Accordingly 
in  the  year  54  B.C.  he  transporled  five  legions  of  Roman  soldicrs 
and  a  great  multitude  of  Gallic  horse-soldiers  to  our  island.  The 
soldiers  of  the  Roman  legions  were  foot-soldiers.^  Caesar  did  not 
feai  the  lcmpests^  of  the  English  channel;  he  did  not  fear  tlie 
arrows  and  cbariots  of  the  British  tiibcs.  From  (ex)  the  pluck 
of  his  soldiers  and  sailors  he  expected  (§  26)  victory. 


§  30.     (jrd  Declension. — Neuiers  in  -nien,  -us  or  -ur.y 
Aniong  Caesar's  legions  was  the  tenth  (§22)  legion.     The  name 
of  the  tenth  legion  was  *  Alauda.'*      The  nameof  the  tenth  legion 
was  famous,  and  dear  to  the  soldiers.     What^  was  the  name  of  the 

^The  word  for  '  foot-soldier '  is  pedes  (%\.em pedit-),  declined  like  miles  and 
eques.     [J>ed-it-  means  properly  'foot-goer,'  as  equ-it-  means  *  horse-goer.'] 

'Use  tempestas,  which  also  means  '  weather'  {Preparations  §29). 

'These  Neuters,  like  the  Masculines  and  Feminines  of  §§  27  anJ  2S,  form 
the  Nominative  Singular  wiihout  adding  an  s.  The  s  of  words  like  tei/ipus 
(wilh  an  r  before  the  ending  of  ihe  Gcn.  Sing.)  is  not  an  addition  to  the  stem 
but  part  of  it  :  bctween  two  vowels,  however,  the  s  changcs  to  r. 

The  Rule  of  Gender  in  the  ^rd  Decl.  is  therefore  : — 

1.  Nouns  denoting  PERSONS  are  Masculine  if  they  denote  MALE 

PERSONS,  Feminine  if  they  denote  FEMALE  PERSONS.     (This 
rule  is  the  same  for  all  declensions). 

2.  Nouns  not  denoting  persons  and  forming  the  Nominative  Singular 

by  adding  an  s  are  mostly  Feminino. 
8.  Not^ns  not  denoting  persons  and  forming  the  Nominative  Singular 
without  adding  an  s  are  mostly — 

Feminine  if  the  Nom.  Sing.  ends  in  10,  DO  or  GO ; 
Neuter  if  the  Nom.  Sing.  ends  in  MEN,  US,  UR,  or  E; 
Masculine  in  other  cases   (for   in^tance   wben  the 
Nom.  Sing.  ends  in  OR). 

*A  Noun  of  the  ist  Declension,  meaning  '  the  Lark.' 

•  Use  quid  [stt  Drill  Ex.  §  3,  p.  106).  In  asking  '  what  is  the  name?'  the 
Romans  regularly  used  the  Pronoun  quid  (not  the  adjectival  form  of  it). 


130  DRILL   EXERCISES 

river  where  there  was  a  great  contest  of  the  Britons  against  the 
Romans?  There-are  many  rivers  in  South  Britain.  Caesar  does 
not  raention^  the  name  of  the  river.  A  Roman  had  three^  names. 
The  first  names  of  Caesar  were  Gaius  and  Juhus.  The  chief  (§12) 
name  of  a  Roman  was  the  second  name. 


§  3 1.     {Same  Nouns  coniinued.) 

{A.)  There  were  many  contests  of  the  Britons  with  the  Romans. 
In  some  of  the  contests  the  Britons  carried  off  the  victory.  But 
they  were  not  able  to  stand  (§  11)  against  the  weight  and  strength 
of  the  Roman  legions.  The  bodies  of  tne  Britons  were  big  and 
strong,  and  the  Roraans  were  mcn  of  small  i;odies.^  But  Caesar's 
legions  were  skilled  (§15)  in*  war.  Accordirigly  they  mostly  (§13) 
carried  off  the  victory  without  many  wounds. 

{B.)  Before  the  time  of  C.  Juhus  Caesfir  Roman  vessels  had 
never  (§25)  sailed  to  our  island,  unless  (§25)  for  the  sake  of 
commerce  (§19).  After  the  time  of  C.  JuHus  Caesar  another  (§24) 
Caesar,  by  name  Claudius,  got-logether  (§  28)  an  expedition  against 
Britain.  In  the  times'  of  Nero^  Agricola  defeated  (§  24)  ihe 
Britons  and  Caledonians.  C.  Julius  Caesar  was  the  first  but  not 
the  chief  (§  12)  conqueror  of  the  Britons. 


'  Use  commemoro,  '  I  mention,'  from  which  comes  the  Adjective  comviemor- 
atns,  a,  um  'mentioned'  (§  14). 

^The  Neuter  of  ircs  (§  27)  is  /r/a. 

'For  'men'  use  homo  ;  and  for  'of  small  bodies'  say  '  wilh  small  bodies,' 
as  in  the  last  line  of  §  30  of  the  story. 

^What  Case  does   the  Adjective  meaning  'skilled'   take  in  Latin?     See 
rnparations  §  15  (p.  73). 

*No  Preposition  in  Latin;  for  'in  the  times'  denotes  time  when;  cf.  p.  69. 
'  A^ero  (stem  Neron-)  was  one  of  the  early  Caesars  or  Emperors  of  Rome, 
belonging  to  the  Julian  family. 


DRILL   EXERCISES  I3I 

§32-  {3^^  Declension. — Feminines  and  Masadines  in  -is,  likt 
*  navis '). 

{A^  Caesar's  fleet  was  large.  For  there-were  not  only  ships  of- 
burden  but  also  ships  of-war  in  the  fleet.  How-many^  ships  sailed 
with  Caesar  on  the  second  expedilion  ?  The  whole  (§  16)  number 
of  the  ships  was  eight-hundred.  Six-hundred  of  (use  ex)  the  ships 
were  ships  of-burden.  The  Romans  sometimes  used-to-name-  ships 
of-burden  '  vessels.'  '  Vessel '  is  a  noun  (say  na^ne)  of  the  second 
declension  (use  declinatio),  but '  ship  '  is  a  noun  of  the  third  (§  23) 
declension. 

{B.)  When  the  enemy^  saw  Caesar's  great  fleet,  they  feared 
(§  2).  But  the  size  of  Caesar's  ships  was  small.  In  the  ships  of- 
burden  were  the  soldiers  and  the  horses-and  the  arms.  Why  did 
Caesar  sail  with  ships  of-war  against  the  British  enemy?^  The 
Britons  had  built  no  ships.  But  Caesar  perhaps  (§  25)  did-not- 
know  (§31)  this.'*  He  had  prepared  his  second  expedition  in^  the 
winter  of  the  year  55  B.C.  He  sailed  in^  the  sumrner  (§29)  of  the 
next  (§28)  year.     In  ancient  times  Rome  ruled^  the  waves. 


§  33.     {Same  Nouns  continued.) 

In  a  Roman  ship  of-burdcn  not  more'^  than  two-hundred  (§32) 
men  were-able  to  sail.  A  ship  of-burden  was  not  so  large  as  a 
ship  of^var.      How-many  men  were-able  to  sail  in  Caesar's  fleet  ? 

1  See  Ex.  §28,  Note  3  (p.  128),  and  Latin  Drill,  §  13. 
*See  Ex.  §27  A,  Note  3  (p.  127). 

*  Use  the  Piural  (enemies). 

*Use  hoc ;  see  Preparations  §  15  (p.  73^. 

*No  Preposition  in  Latin  ;  for  *in  the  winter'  and  'in  the  summer'  denote 
time  -u<hen,  like  '  in  the  second  century '  {Prep.  §  10),  '  last  year '  (§  16),  etc. 

•  Say  was  rnistress  0/. 

'The  Singular  Number  of  the  word  meaning  '  morc '  {P>ep.  §33)isgood 
Latin  here  ;  but  the  Verb  '  were-able '  must  be  Plural,  as  in  the  English. 


132  DRILL   EXERCISES 

On  a  Roinan  ship  of-war  there-were  somelimes  high  turrets,  as 
(§  i8)  on  ships  of-the-present-day  (§i8).  From  the  high  turrets 
the  soldiers  used  to  drive-off  (§  25)  the  enemy  with  spears  (§18). 
An  ancient  ship  of-war  had  sails  and  oars.  An  ancient  ship  of-war 
was  not  armed  with  iron  plates.  An  ancient  ship  of-war  was  not 
so  large  as  a  ship  of-war  of-the-present-day. 


§34.  {jfd  Dechnsion. — Feminines  and  Afasciilines  whose  siems 
end  ifi  iwo  consonanis.) 

(A.)  Cassivellaunus  was  king  of  a  small  part  of  South  Britain 
What^  was  the  name  of  the  race?  In  ancient  times^  there-were 
many  races  and  many  kings  in  Britain.  Many^  of  the  races  were 
barbarous.  But  the  races  of  the  Southern  (use  meridianus,  a,  um) 
parts  were  not  barbarous.  Before  the  times  of  Caesar  Cassi- 
vellaunus  had  fought  against  the-other  (§  19)  races  of  South 
Britain.  The  name  of  the  king  of  the  Trinobantes  was 
Imanuentius. 

(B.)  The  boundaries  of  many  British  races  are  not  known  (§  16) 
to  us.  The  names  of  the  British  kings  are  mostly  (§13)  not 
mentioned  (§14)  in  the  book  of  Caesar.  Britain  was  not  a  part 
of  the  Roman  empire*  after  the  victory  of  Caesar.  After  the 
time  of  Claudius,  the  fourth  (§29)  Caesar,  ^  Britain  was  under  the 
command^  of  the  Caesars.  The  name  of  the  family  {u^e  ^ens)  of 
C.  JuHus  Caesar  was  the  Julian  family.  The  Romans  used-to- 
name  the  Caesars  "  Princes  "  and  "  Generals." 

^See  Ex.  §30,  note  5  (p.  129). 

^See  Ex.  §31,  note  5  (p.  130). 

'What  Gender?  '  Maiiy  of  the  races'  means  '  many  rac^s  of  the  races.' 
For  '  of '  use  ex. 

*  Use  impcnmn. 

'In  what  case  must  '  the  fourth  Caesar'  be  ?  Tliink  of  the  meaning 
(ajicr  the  tixi  ef  the  fourth  Caesar). 


DRILL   EXERCISES  133 

^  35-     {Sa/ne  Nouns  iO/iiinued.) 

{A.)  Sonie^  of  ihe  Soulhem  or  maritime  races  of  Britain  were 
Belgians  (§  15).  But  the  Eelgae  were  of  German  origin,  as  Caesar 
tells  us  in  the  'Gallic  War.'  The  chapter  is  the  fourth  of  the  second 
book.  Therefore  there-were  people^  of  German  origin  in  Britain 
in  the  first  and  second  century  B,C.  The  inhabitants  of  modem 
Britain  (say  of  Britain  of-the-preseni-day)  are  mostly  of  German 
origin.  But  they  migrated  across  the  German  ocean  into  Britain 
in  the  fourth  and  the  fifth  century  after  the  birth  of  Christ. 

{B.)  Many  modern  cities  are  named  from  (use  ex)  the  Belgian 
(§  1 1)  races  of  Kent.  The  names  of  the  cities  are  Belgian.  But 
the  Belgians  of  Britain  used  not  to  build  cities,  if  the  testimony 
(§  1 7)  of  Caesar  is  true.  Winchester  (§  1 5)  is  the  name  of  an  ancient 
city  of  South  Britain.  The  inhabitants  of  cities  are  not  barbarous. 
Caesar  tells  us  about  Brilish  '  towns.'  The  British  '  towns  '  were 
different  from  (§  19)  cities. 


§36.  [jrd  Dec/ension. — Neuters  in  -e,  like  'mare.') 
The  British  sea  separates  (§34)  Britain  from  Gaul.  A  part  of 
the  British  sea  is  named  the  '  GaUic  channel.'  Some  of  the 
Gauls  used-to-sail  across  the  British  sea  to  Brilain  for  the  sake  of 
commerce.  London  is  not  many  miles  distant  from  the  sea.  The 
Biitons  did  not  fight  against  Caesar  on  the  sea,  because  they  had 
never  (§25)  built  ships.  British  sailors  now  sail  across  many  seas. 
On  many  seas  and  in  many  lands  (§4)  you  see  the  British  flag  (§  1 1). 

^What  Gender?  '  Some  of  the  races'  means  '  some  races  of  the  races.' 
For  '  of '  use  ex. 

"  Say  men,  and  use  Aomo  {Prep.  §  30).  Ilomo  means  '  human  being  '  and 
includes  women  ;  vir  does  not  include  women.  The  Plural  oihomo  is  Ihe  only 
word  tlial  can  be  used  for  '  people '  in  the  sense  of  '  persons ' ;  for  populus 
means  '  o  peopie '  in  ihe  sense  of  '  a  nation '  or  '  a  tribe,'  and  the  Plural 
populi  means  '  nations '  or  '  tribes.' 


134  DRILL   EXERCISES 

§37.  {Recapitulation  of  Nouns  of  jrd  Dedension.) 
The  British  soldiers  used-to-fight  from  {out-of)  chariots.  Caesar 
had  not  only  foot-soldiers  but  also  horse-soldiers  (§29).  But  the 
mobility  of  the  Roman  soldiers  was  not  great.  Accordingly  the 
enemy  often  used-to-thro\v-into-confusion  the  ranks  of  the  Romans. 
In  modern  times  ^  horse-soldiers  sometimes  carry  (§6)  the  arms 
(§30)  of  foot-soldiers.  Thus  they  are  able  to  leap-  down-from 
(§14)  their  horses  and  to  fight  on-foot.  The  Boers  ^  of  South 
Africa  have  horse-soldiers  of-this-kind. 


§38.     {Recapitulation  of  Nouns  ofjrd  JDeclension  continued.) 

The  boundaries  (§34)  of  the  Cassi  were  across  (§35)  the  rivcr 
Thames.  The  Brilish  leader  (§29)  used  not  to  fight  against  the 
Romans  in  proper  (§37)  battles.  He  used  to  dash  suddenly  out- 
of  the  woods  and  attack  the  Roman  legions.  Then  he  used  to 
recall  (§31)  his  horse-soldiers  and  his  chariots.  The  British  leader 
had  many  thousands  (§  36)  of  charioteers.  Accordingly  he  some- 
times  used-to-carry-ofif  the  victory.  There-were  ten  cohorts  in  a 
Roman  legion,  and  about  (§36)  five-hundred  (§36)  men  in  a 
cohort.  Accordingly  there-were  about  five  (§26)  thousand  men 
Issiy  five  thousands  of  men)  in  a  legion. 


§  39.     {Recapitulation  of  Nouns  of  jrd  Decletision  continued.) 

Caesar  hastened  to  the  banks  of  the  river  Thames.  *     Where 

was  the   'town'  of  Cassivellaunus?     Caesar  does  not  name  the 

town.     The  town  was  not  a  city.     It  was  not  strengthened  (§  30) 

with  walls.     It  was  not  London.    But  it  was  not  far  from  London. 

'See  Ex.  §31,  Note  5  (p.  130). 

"  Say  give  themselves,  as  in  §  25  of  the  story. 

»5aA7r7  (  =  Dutch). 

*  In  what  Case  must  '  Thames  *  be  ?    Think  of  the  meaning. 


DRILL   EXERCISES  135 

Perhaps^  it  was  St.  Albans,  '  as  sonie  learned  men  have  aflirmed. 
Caesar  tells  about  the  town  of  Cassivellaunus  in  the  fifth  book  of 
the  Gallic  War. 


§40.  {Recapitulation  of  Nouns  0/  jrd  Declension  coniinited.) 
Caesar's  carap  was^  in  Kent.  There-is  also  a  place  in  Souih 
Africa  named*  Caesar's  Camp.  The  tribes  of  Kent  fought  bravely 
for  {pn-behalf-of)  their  native-land  (§4),  but  the  Trinobantes  were 
friends  of  the  Romans  and  enemies  of  the  Cassi.  Accordingly  the 
unhappy  Britons  fought  in-vain.  At-length  (§25)  many  states 
begged  peace  from  («)  Caesar.  The  conditions  of  peace  wcre 
hard  (say  rough,  §13).  After  the  peace  Caesar  sold^  a  great 
multitude  of  British  captives  (§19).  Thus  many  British  men  and 
women  (§20)  and  children  were  slaves  (§19)  of  the  Romans  in  the 
first  century  before  the  birth  of  Christ. 


§  41.     {Nouns  of  jrd  Declension  continued.)  • 

Thus  (§16)  Caesar  carried-off  the  victory  and  imposed  a  tribute 
upon^  the  inhabitants  of  South  Britain.  The  Romans  carried-off 
the  victory  because  (§1 5)  they  were  skilled  (§15)  in  war.  The  tenth 
legion  was  with  Caesar  in  Britain.  Caesar  loved  the  tcnth  legion. 
In  the  first  expedition,  while  the  Romans  hesitated  (§25)  to  fight, 


'  For  '  perhaps '  see  Preparations  §  25. 

'  Veruldinium. 

'  Remember  that  the  Verb  must  agree  with  its  Subject  [castra). 

*  Remember  that  the  Adjective  must  agree  with  its  Noun.  Which  is  the 
Noun  to  which  the  Adjective  'named'  belongs? 

'  Venum-do,  '  l  sell,'  is  a  compound  of  do,  'I  give,*  meaning  liter.illy  '  I 
offer  for  sale,'  and  forms  its  Pcrfect  hke  do. 

•The  Adjectives  of  the  3rd  Declension  are  deferred  till  §42. 

'  Imitate  the  construction  given  in  §  40  of  the  story. 


136  DRILL  exercises 

the  eagle-bearer  of  the  tenth  legion  leaped  ^  into  the  waves  and 
carried  (§6)  thc  Roman  eagle  (.§  25)  to  the  land  (§4).  Accordingly 
the  Romans  defeated  (§24)  the  Britons  on-account-of  (§33)  the 
pluck  of  the  ea^le-bearer.  The  Roman  eagles  were  made-of-silver 
(§9)  and  served  as-  flags. 


§  42.     {Adjectives  of  the  jrd  Declension.) 

(A.)  The  ancient  Biitons  were  brave  men.  They  fought  with' 
admirable  pluck.  The  bodies  of  the  ancient  Britons  were  big  and 
strong.  The  Romans  were  not  so  {%33)  big  as  the  Britons ;  but 
by  means  of  the  science  of  war  they  were  able  to  carry-oflf 
the  victory  from  the  Britons.  Cacsar  was  a  distinguished  general. 
He  had  defeated  the  brave  tribes  of  Belgic  Gaul  in  a  short  time. 
Victory  was  sweet  to  Caesar. 

(B.)  Not  all*  the  British  states  (§40)  had  fought  against  Caesar. 
There  had  never  (§25)  been  an  aUiance  (§34)  of  all  the  tribes  of 
Britain  against  an  enemy.  It'  is  wonderful  ihat  (§41)  the  Britons 
were-able  to  fight  so  (§41)  successfully  against  the  conquerors  of 
so-many  (§40)  seas  and  lands.  The  name  of  Caesar  was  dis- 
tinguished  through  (§26)  the  whole  (§16)  world  (§41).  The  soldiers 
of  the  tenth  legion  were  veterans.  It  *  is  sweet  to  fight  and,  if  it  is 
necessary  (§24),  to  die*  for  (§40)  one's^  native-land. 


»See  Ex.  §37,  note  2  (p.  134). 

''Say  7vere  instead-of ;  cf.  §  n  of  the  story  ("  the  skins  served  as  sails.") 

*See  Ex.  §20,  note  i  (p.  121,  on  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition). 

''Adjectives  meaning  '  all/  unlike  other  Adjectives,  generally  coine  before 
Iheir  Nouns  in  Latin  :  cf.  nole  2,  p.  iii,  and  Rule  i  of  Oider,  p.  lox. 

'  No  separate  word  for  'it';  but  the  Adjective  after  *is'  must  be  in  the 
Neuter  Gender,  as  in  §41  of  the  story. 

•  Say  '  to  expire,'  exspirare. 

'  Omit  the  word  '  one's '  in  translating. 


DRILL   EXERCISES  137 

§43.      {Adjeclives  0/  jrd  Declension  conti/iued.) 

The  tribes  of  Belgic  Gaul  also  were  warlike.^  Caesar  had 
slaughtered  (§20)  a  huge  number  of  the  brave  Nervii,  fighting^ 
against  the  Romans.  The  British  auxiUaries  had  been  useful  to' 
the  Veneti.  Accordingly  Caesar  waged-war  against  the  "  arrogant 
Britons."  And  he  carriedoff  a  huge  number  of  British  slaves  and 
captives. 

"The  time  is  short,"  says  my  uncle;  "it  is  necessary  (§24)  to 
hasten  homewards.  It*  has  been  pleasaiit  to  you,  as  I  hope,  to 
see  a  Briiish  ship  of-war  and  to  walk  to  the  place  where  Caesar 
fought  with  the  Britons."  We  all^  approved-of  (§41)  the  opinion 
of  my  uncle. 


GOD  SAVE  THE  KINa 


'  Use  ferox,  which  as  the  name  of  a  ship  in  the  Channel  squadron  is  trans- 
lated  '  the  Furious '  in  §  42  of  the  story.  All  the  names  of  ships  given  there 
can  be  used  as  Adjectives,  but  niust  then  not  be  spelled  with  capital  letters. 

^"  Fighting'  is  an  Adjective  describing  the  Nervii.  In  what  Case  must  it, 
then,  be? 

• '  Useful  to'  is  like  '  dear  to  '  {Preparations  §  15), 

*See  Ex.  §42,  note  5  (p.  136). 

'  Say  '  all  wc-approvcd.' 


APPENDICES.  ^ 

I. — On    Adjectives   in    -NDUS,    A,    UM  and  Nouns 
iN  -NDUM. 

The  Adjectives  in  -ndus,  a,  um  differ  from  other  Adjectives 
only  in  the  following  respects  : — 

(i)  They  are  all  formed  from  the  stems  of  Verbs.  In  EngUsh, 
too,  we  have  many  Adjectives  formed  from  Verbs,  and  some  of 
them  are  similar  in  meaning  to  the  Latin  Adjectives  in  -ndns, 
a,  um ;  for  instance  'laud-able'  (frora  'I  laud,'  Lat.  laudd), 
'lov-able'  (in  the  sense  'worthy  to  be  loved,')  *eat-able'  (in  the 
sense  'fit  to  be  eaten.') 

(2)  They  cannot  always  be  translated  by  Adjectives  in  Enghsh, 
because  English  gcneraliy  has  no  Adjective  with  exactly  the  same 
meaning ;  so  they  have  often  to  be  translated  by  a  phrase  Uke 
' to-be-loved,'  'tobe-read,'  * to-be-eaten.'  Sometimes  it  is  con- 
venient  to  translate  them  in  other  ways. 

The  foUowing  sentences,  taken  from  the  story,  should  be  care- 
fully  examined. 

Audacia  aquiliferi  erat  laudanda,  'the  courage  of  the  eagle-bearer 


^  These  Appendices  are  not  intended  to  be  used  by  tlie  pupil  except  as  a 
summary  and  fuller  explanation  of  some  of  the  constructions  wliich  have  been 
met  wilh  in  the  text.  But  they  are  written  with  a  view  to  the  neeJs  of 
beginners,  and  are  thrown  into  a  form  which  the  writer  has  found  to  be 
capable  of  appealing  to  the  minds  even  of  young  pupils,  if  brought  before  them 
gradually  and  on  seasonable  occasions. 


APPENDICES  139 

was  laud-able  or  praise-woithy '  (§25).  Here  the  Adjeciive 
laudanda  (feminine  of  laudandus,  to  agree  with  audacia)  is 
formed  from  the  Verb  laudo,  '  I  praise,'  and  it  has  the  same 
meaning  as  the  English  Adjective  formed  with  '-able'or 
'-worthy,'  but  we  may  also  translate  it  by  ' worthy-to-be 
praised,'  or  simply  '  to-be-praised.'  This  Adjective,  like 
other  Adjectives,  may  be  used  wilhout  the  Verb  '  to  be,' 
and  in  any  Case ;  thus  we  get 

NoM.    audacia  laudania,  '  laudable  courage' 
Acc.      audftciam  laudandavi,  '  laudable  courage ' 
Gen.     audaciae  laudandae,  '  of  laudable  courage,'  etc 
Hence  such  a  phrase  may   be  made  to  depend  on  a 
Preposition,  as  shown  in  the  next  sentence. 

Locus  erat  idoneus  adnavigia  applicattda,  'there  was  a  place  suitable 
for  vessels  to-be-brought-to-land '  (24).  Here  the  phrase 
navigia  applicanda,  '  vessels  to-be-brought-to-land '  depends 
on  ad  in  the  sense  of  '  for.'  Compare  in  Enghsh  such 
common  sentences  as  '  Ring  the  bell  for  the  dinner  to  be 
gut  ready.'  (Latin  ad  cenam  parandam.) 
The  Nouns  in  -ndum  differ  from  other  Nouns  only  in  the 
following  respects  : — 

(i)  They  are  all  formed  from  the  stems  of  Verbs,  just  as  in 
Enghsh  we  may  form  a  Noun  out  of  any  Verb  by  adding  '-ing.' 
Thus  where  in  English  we  speak  of  '  row-ing,'  '  walk  ing,' 
'  visit-ing,'  etc,  the  Romans  used  the  Nouns  remigandum,  atnbul- 
andum,  visitandum,  etc. 

(2)  They  are  hke  Verbs  in  so  far  as  they  take  the  same  con- 
structions  as  the  Verbs  from  which  they  are  formed.  So,  too,  do 
the  Enghsh  Nouns  formed  from  Verbs;  thus  we  speak  of  'rowing 
quickly,'  '  walking  slowly '  (with  Adverbs,  though  sometimes  also 
with  Adjectives),  and  'visiting  a  friend,'  '  exploring  a  country' 
(with  Objects  depending  on  the  Nouns  in  '  -ing  '). 


140  APPENDICES 

Labor  revngandi  magnus  erat,  '  the  labour  of  rowing  was  great' 
(§29).  Here  7-emigandi '\%  the  Genitive  Case  of  the  Noun 
remigandum  formed  from  rejnigo,  *  I  row.' 

Paratine  estis  adambulandu/n  1  'are  you  ready  for  walking  ? '  (§23). 
Here  ambulandum   is   the  Accusative  Case  of  the  Noun 
formcd  from  atnbulo,  '  I  walk,'  and  depends  on  c7</meaning 
•'for.' 

Cupidus  erat  visitandi  et  explorandi  insula?n  nostram,  '  he  was 
desirous  of  visiting  and  exploring  our  island '  (§  28).  Here 
the  Genitives  of  the  Nouns  visitandum  and  exploranduni 
take  an  Object  in  the  Accusative. 

The  following  sentences,  taken  from  the  story,  contain  furlher 
examples  of  the  above  constructions  (Adjectives  and  Nouns). 

Virtus  militum  erat  magnopere  laudanda  (§29).  Here  the 
Adjective  is  quaUfied  by  an  Adverb  (as  other  Adjectives 
may  be). 

Navigia  novis  armis  ornanda  erant  (§31). 

Locus  idoneus  est  ad  copias  explicandas  (§25). 

Naves  onerariae  aptae  erant  ad  onera  transportanda  (§32).  * 

Rofnani  Britannos  scientia  pugnandi  superabant  (§30). 

[No  example  occurs  in  the  story  of  the  Noun  in  -ndum  with  est 
denoting  'must'  or  'ought.'  This  is  a  special  use  and  sense, 
which  is  best  deferred  for  subsequent  study.] 


*  Such  sentences  may  also  be  translated  by  an  entirely  different  form  of 
speech  in  English  ('for  deploying  forces.')  Here  'deploying'  is  a  Noun 
formed  from  the  Verb  '  deploy.'  But  this  translation  leads  to  confusion  willi  the 
use  of  the  Latin  Noun  in  -ndum,  and  should  therefore  be  avoided  so  far  as 
possible  by  beginners. 


APPENDICES  141 

II.— HOW  TO  TRANSLATE   ENGLISH   PREPOSITIONS 
INTO  LATIN. 

Where  EngHsh  has  a  Prcposition  Latin  generally  has  one  also. 

Most  of  these  Latin  Prepositions  take  the  Accusative  Case,  but 

sonie  of  them  (especially  ab  or  ^,  ciint,  de,  ex,  in  whcn  it  means 

*in'  or  'on,'  pro,  suh  when  it  means  'under,'  and  sine^  take  the 

Ablative :  it  should  be  noted  that  no  Latin  Prepositions  take  the 

Dative  or  the  Genitive.    But  it  has  been  scen  that  'of  is  generally 

expressed  by  the  Genitive  alone,  and  '  to  '  very  often  by  the  Dative 

alone;  also  that  'from,'  'at,'  'in,'  '  with,'  'by,'  and  '  by  means  of 

are  sometimes  expressed  by  the  Ablative  alone.     The  foUowing 

rules,  based  upon  examples  wliich  have  occurred  in   this   book, 

will  give  some  guidance  as  to  when  the  above  Prepositions  are  to 

be  translated  by  Prepositions  in  Latin  and  when  by  a  Case  without 

any  Preposition;  but  the  rules  are  only  an  outline,  to  be  fiUcd  up  by 

future  reading,  and  they  deal  only  with  the  most  important  usages. 

OF  is  generally  translated  by  the  Genitive,  as  in  '  the  door  of 

the   country-house,'  ianua  villae  (§1),    *the  courage  of  sailors,' 

audacia  jtautarum  (§2),  '  traces  of  the  Romans,'  vesiigia  Roman- 

orum  (§9),   'a  task  of  great  labour,' ^/>«,y  viagni  laboris  (  =  'very 

laborious,'  §31),  'an  abundance  of  plants,'  copia  planiarum  (§3),  'a 

great  number  of  coins,'  magnus  numerus  nuinmorum  (§9).^ 

But  (i.)  in  such  phrases  as  'some  of,'  '  many  of,'  the  'of '  may  be 

translated  by  ex  with   the  Ablative;    thus  'some  of  the 

vessels '    may    be   translated   nonnulla   ex   navigiis   (§  1 1), 

*  many  of  the  tribes,'  jnulti  ex  populis  (§  1 8). 

(ii.)  when  the  phrase  '  of '  describes  a  quality  of  the 

person  or  thing  spoken  of,  it  is  sometimes  translated  by  the 
Ablative  without  a  Preposition  ;  thus  'men  of  robust  body' 
is  homines  robusto  corpore  (§30) :  cf.  §  43,  note  on  p.  99. 

'  It  may  be  noted  that  the  '  of '  in  many  of  these  examples  does  not  denote 
possession. 


142  APPENDICES 

TO  is  generally  translated  by  ad  wilh  the  Accusative  (or  sonie- 
times  by  in  with  the  Accusalive,  §ii)  when  it  comes  after  a  verb 
of  '  going '  or  any  verb  that  denotes  motion,  such  as  '  bring '  or 
*  carry '  or  '  send  : '  thus  '  I  walk  to  the  wood  '  is  ad  silvatn  ambiik 
(§5).  But  it  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  Accusative  w'..hout  a 
Preposition,  sometimes  by  the  Dative ;  viz.  : — 

By  the  Accusative  without  a  Preposition  when  it  comes  before 
the  name  of  a  Town :  thus  '  he  brought  his  vessels  to  Dover '  is 
navigia  Diibras  applicavit  (§24),  'I  walked  to  London '  is 
Londiniiitn  amhulavi. 

By  ^he  Dative  in  the  following  cases  : 

(i)  when  it  comes  after  a  verb  of  'giving';  thus  'it  gives 
delight  to  Lydia,'  is  Lydiae  laetitiam  dat  (§5),  'they  had 
suppUed  auxiliaries  to  the  Gauls '  is  Gallis  auxilia  sub- 
ministraverant  (§27). 

(ii)  when  it  comes  after  the  verb  '  to  be'  in  the  phrase  'there 
is  to  sonieone  '  =  'someone  has ' ;  thus  '  my  uncle  has  coins' 
\%  patruo  meo  nummi  sufit  (§  9). 

(iii)  when  it  comes  after  Adjectives  which  can  take  'to'  in 
English,  like 'dear,'  'pleasant,'  'useful';  thus 'he  is  dear 
to  us '  is  twbis  carus  est  (§15). 

FROM  is  generally  translated  by  ab  or  ex  with  the  Ablative ; 
but  by  the  Ablative  alone — 

(i)  when  it  comes  after  certain  Verbs  and  Adjectives  with  the 
sense  of  '  free ' ;  thus  '  he  is  free  from  miiitary  service  '  is 
militia  vacat  (§  6),  'free  from  lessons '  is  liber  scholis  (§  1 2). 

(ii)  when  it  comes  before  the  name  of  a  Town  and  after  a 
Verb  of  *  going '  or  any  Verb  that  denotes  motion ;  tlius 
'  they  will  arrive  from  Dover '  is  Dubris  adventabunt 
(§22). 


APPENDICES  T43 

IN  or  AT^  \s  generally  traiislated  by  in  with  the  Ablative ;  but 
by  the  Ablative  alone — 

(i)  when  it  comes  before  a  Noun  denoting  time,  such  as  '  day,' 
'month,'  'year,'  '  century,'  'hour';  ihus  'in  the  second 
century '  is  seaindo  saeculo  (§  i  o),  '  in  the  next  year '  is 
proximo  anno  (§28),  'at  what  o'clock?'  is  quota  horal  (§21). 
(ii)  when  it  cames  before  a  Noun  denoting  price  or  value ' : 
thus  'at  a  great  price  '  is  ^tiagno pretio  (§  9). 

WITH  is  translated  by  cum  with  the  Ablative  when  it  means 
'  together  with  '  or  '  in  company  with  '  (as  in  '  I  walk  with  my 
aunt,'  cum  amita  mea  ambulo,  §3,  or  '  fighting  with  the  Romans,' 
cufn  Romams  pugnantes,  §43)  ^ ;  but  by  the  Ablative  alone  in 
other  senses ;  viz : — 

(i)  when  'with'  means  'bymeans  of;'  thus  'they  used  to 
fight  with  spears  and  arrows '  is  hastis  et  sagittis 
pugnabant  (§18):  here  'spears  and  arrows'  are  the 
instruments  with  which  they  fought.  Similarly  when 
*  with '  comes  after  Adjectives  meaning  '  fi.lled  ' ;  thus 
'  fiUed  with  victims'  is  plenus  victimis  (§20)^,  '  crowded 
with  children'  is  creber  pueris  et puelHs  (§15). 

(ii)  when  the  phrase    '  with '  answers   the   question 

'  how  ?  ' ;  thus  '  they  used  to  fight  with  great  courage  '  is 
magna  audacia  pugnabant.  Here  '  with  great  courage ' 
describes  the  manner  in  which  they  fought. 

^  When  '  at '  comes  before  the  name  of  a  Town,  it  is  translated  by  the 
Locative  without  a  Preposition  ;  but  no  example  of  this  Case  occurs  in  this 
book.  The  Locative,  however,  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  Ablative,  except  in 
the  Ist  and  2nd  Declension,  Singular  Number. 

^  Sometimes  M«a  'together'  is  added,  as  in  '  together  with  a  multilude  0/ 
Gallic  auxiliaries,   una  cum  multiludiite  aiixiliorum  Galliiorum  (§  28). 

*  But  just  as  in  English  we  may  say  not  only  '  filled  ivith '  but  also  '  full  of,^ 
so  in  Latin  pUnus  may  take  the  Genitive  ;  thus  '  full  of  joys '  is  plenus 
gaudiorum  (f  13). 


144  APPENDICES 

(iii)  when  the  phrase   'with    '  answers  the  question 

'  why  ? '  thus  '  the  cUmate  was  hideous  with  rains  '  is 
caebim  plnviis  foediiin  erat  (§17).  Here  'with  rains' 
means  '  because  of  rains.' 

(iv)  when  the  phrase  '  with  *  describes  a  quality  of  the 

person  or  thing  spoken  of ';  thus  'a  man  with  a  robust 
body'  is  homo  fobusto  corpore  (§30),  'aboy  with  blue 
eyes '  is  puer  oculis  caeruieis. 

B  Y MEANS  OF  is  sometimcs  translated  hy per  ('through')  with 
tlie  Accusative,  but  generally  by  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition: 
thus  '  they  used  to  fasten  their  ships  by  means  of  iron  chains '  is 
naves  catenis  fej-reis  deligahant  (§  33),  '  he  hastened  to  the  Thames 
by  means  of  uninterrupted  marches'  \%  continuis  itineribus  ad 
Tamesain  properavit  (§  38). 

^F  is  sometimes  translated  by  ab  or  a  with  the  Ablative,  but 
generally  by  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition :  thus  '  by  reason 
(  =  for  thc  sake)  of  commcrce  '  is  mercaturae  causa  (§  l  9),  cf.  animi 
causa  (§20);  'by  land  and  by  sea'  is  terra  marique  (§43). 

III.— GENERAL  RULES  OF  ORDER. 

RuLE  I. — Anything  that  goes  with  a  Xo'm  (excepting  a  Pre- 
position)is  generally  put  after  that  Noun  in  Latin  ;  thus  'villa 
bella,^  '  villa  amitae  meae.'  Exxept  Numeral  Adjectives  and 
Adjectives  meaning  'all,'  'some,'  '  many,'  'few.'* 

RuLE  2. — Anything  that  goes  with  a  Verb  or  an  Adjective  or 
an  Adverb  is  generally  put  before  that  Verb,  Adjective  or  Adverb 
in  Latin  ;  thus  ^  saepe  specto,'  ';w«  specto,'  '  scapham  specto,'  ' /« 
j<ra///(3  navigo ' ;  ';w«magnus';  '«<?«saepe.' 

*  Demonslralive  Adjcclives  (moaning  'iliis'  or  '  llvat ')  and  Intcrrogative 
Adjectives  (meaning  '  wliich?'  or  '  what?')  also  precede  their  Nouns  in  Latin, 
as  in  English  ;  but  the  Demonslialivcs  do  not  occur  in  this  book.  An  Inter- 
logative  occurs  in  quota  hoia ? 


ALPHABETICAL   VOCABULARY. 

The  words  printed  in  Llack  type  are  essentiai  words  which  need  tobe  learned 
by  heartj  as  occuring  most  often  in  the  text  and  for  the  sake  of  their  im- 
portance. 

Words  of  the  third  declension  have  the  stem  inserted  in  brackets,  except 
where  it  is  the  same  as  the  Nom.  Sing.  (e.g.  arbor).  To  words  like  tiavis  the 
Gen.  Piur.  is  given.  Genders  are  given  where  irregular  accordingto  ihe  rules 
on  p.  75  and  p.  129  (m.  =masculine,  f.=feminine,  n.  =  neuter). 

The  figures  i,  2,  3  denote  the  declension  or  conjugation. 


ab  or  5  (with  Abl.),  from;  ab 
occidente  parte  (§35),  off  the 
West  side,  on  the  West 

ab-sum,  ab-esse,  a-fuT,  latti  distanty 
I  atti  absent 

abundo,  l,  I ahoitnd  [Ah\.=in) 

accommodatus,  a,  um,  suited  [ac- 
comodated] 

acciiso,  I,  I  accuse 

acutus,  a,  um,  sharp  [acute] 

ad  (with  Acc),  to  ;  sometimes  yi»r 
or  at  or  near  (see  §§  15,  23,  24) 

adhuc,  hilherto 

admirabilis,  3,  adj.,  adinirable 

ad-8um,    ad-esse,    ad-fui,    /  am 
present 

adulescentulus,  2,  youn^  man 

adventS,  i,  I  arrive 

adversus,  a,  um,  adverse 

aedificium,  2,  huildiiig  [edifice) 

aedificS,  i,  I  build 

acr  (afir-),  3,  m.,  air 

aeneus,  a,  um,  made  of  copfer 

aes  (aer-),  3,  n.,  copper  or  hrass 

aestas  (aestat-),  3,  summer 

aetas  (-tat-),  3,    a^^e 

affirmO,  i,    I  affirm,  state 

atnictu,  I,  /  T^rifr/t  [afflict] 

agellus,  2,farm,  estate 

ager,  ngr-um,  -I,  -6,  2,  field 

agger,  3,    mouiid 

agricola,  \,  farnier 

albus,  a,  um,  white 


Alexander,  Alexandr-um,  -T,  -o,  2, 

Alexatider 
aliqu.indo,  soitie  day 
aliquantum,  a  consideraHe  aitiount 
alius,   alia,    aliud,   other  (Gen.  and 

Dat.  Sing.  irregular) 
alter,    altcra,     alterum,    another,    a 

secotid  (Gen.    and   Dat.    Sing. 

irregular) 
altuB,  a,  um,  high,  lofty  [alti-tude] 
amabo  te,  please 
ambuliiiio  (-ion-),  3,  vjalk 
ambulo,  I,  I  -valk 
amlcitia,  l,  friendship 
amicUB,  2,friend 
amita,  I,  aunt 
am8,  I,  I  love,  Hke 
amphitheairum,  2,  amphitheatre 
an,  or  (in  a  queslion) 
ancilla,  I,  maid-servant 
ancora,  i,  anchor 
Anderida  silva,  the  Andredsweald 
Anglicus,  a,  um,  Etif^lish 
angulus,  2,  ani^le,  coriur 
animuB,  2,  tiiind:  aninuts  ingratus, 

iiigratitude 
annns,  2,  year  [annual] 
ante  (with  Acc. ),  hefore 
antea  (Adverb),  hefore 
antiquua,  a,  um,  ancient 
AniOnius,  2,  AiUony 
anxius,  a,  um,  anxious 
aper,  apr-um,  -I,  -6,  2,  wild  boaf 


146 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


apertus,  a,  nm,  open 

applicO,  I,  I  bring  to  land  [apply] 

appropinqnO,  i,  I  approach 

aptns,  a,  um,yf//'<ri/[apt] 

apud  (with  Acc. ),  in  the  house  of, 

French  chez 
aqna,  water,  i  [aquarium] 
aquila,  i,  eagle 
aquilifer,  2,  eagle-bearer 
ara,  i,  altar 
arbor,  3,  f.,  tree 
area,  i,  open  space  [area] 
arena,  i,  sand 

argenteus,  a,  um,  made  of  silver 
argentum,  ^^^Vz^^r^French  'argent'] 
aries  (ariet-),  3,  m.,  ram 
arithmetica,  i,  arithmetic 


anna,  neut.  plur.,  2,  arms,  fittingi 

armatus,  a,  um,  armed 

armentum,  2,  herd 

arS,  I,  I plough 

arrogans  (arrogant-),  3,  adj.,  arr(h 

gant 
asper,  aspera,  asperum,  rough 
ater,  atra,  atrum,  dark 
atqne,  and  also,  aye  and 
audacia,  l,  coura^e,  audacity 
aureus,  a,  um,  golden 
ausculto,  I,  I  listen 
autem,  however 
auxilium,  2,  help,  aid 

auxilia  (plur.),  auxiliaries 
avaritia,  i,  avarice 


B. 


baca,  I,  berry 

barbarus,  a,  um,  barharous 

basilica,  l,  hasilica,  church 

beatus,  a,  um,  happy 

Belgae,  i,  pl.,  Belgians,  a  tribe  in 
the  North  of  Gaul  and  also  in 
South  Britain  (Hampshire) 

Belgicus,  a,  um,  Belgian 

Belgium,  2,  Belgium 

bellicosus,  a,  um,  warlike 


bell5,  I ,  /  wage  war 

bellum,  2,  war 

bellus,  a,  um,  beautiful,  j»Uy,  pretty 

[French  bel,  belle] 
bene,  well ;  bene  ambula,  §  23 
bos  (bov-),  3,  m.  or  f.,  ox 
bre%ns,  3,  adj.,  brief,  short 
Britannia,  i,  Brilaiii 
Britannicus,  a,  um,  British 
Britannus,  2,  Briton 


c. 


C.  =Gaius  (Gaium,  Gai,  Gaio) 
cachinno,  i,  I  laugh 
caelum,  2,  sky,  climate 
caeruleus,  a,  um,  blue 
Caesar,  3,  Caesar 
Caledonia,  i,  Scotland 
Caledonius,  2,  Caledoniar. 
calor  (calor-),  3,  heat 
Cambria,  i,   Wales 
campus,  2,  plain 
Canlium,  2,  Kent 
cantO,  I,  I  sing 
capillus,  2,  hair 
captivus,  2,  captive 
capt5,  l,  I  catch 


caput  (capit),  3,  n.,  head,  chapter 

carina,  l,  keel 

c3ruB,  a,  um,  dear 

casa,  I,  cottage 

Cassi,  2,  a  tribe  in  Hertfordshire 

Cassivellaunus,  2,  King  of  ihe  Cassi 

in  Hertfordshire 
castanea,  i,  chestnut-tree 
castellum,  2,fort  [castle] 
ca«tra,  neut.  pl.,  2,  camp 
catena,  i,  chain 
catulus,  2,  dog 
cauaa,    i,  cause,  reason :  causa,  hy 

reason,  for  the  sake 
celeriter,  quickly 


ALPHABETICAL    VQCABULARY 


147 


Celta,  I,  Celt 

cena,  i,  supper,  late  dinner 

cenO,  I,  I  sup,  dine 

certamen  (-min-),  3,  contest 

certe,  at  any  raie 

cervus,  2,  stag 

ceteri,  ae,  a,  the  others,  tke  rest 

cetera  (n.)  =  Erig.  'etcetera' 
Christus,  2,  Christ 
Christianus,  a,  um,  Christian 
cibus,  2,food 
circiter,  about 
circum  (Preposition  with  Acc.  ;  or 

Adverb),  arottnd 
circum-do,  -dare,  -dedi,  I surround 
clvitaa  (-tat-),  3,  state  [city] 
clades,  3,  disaster 
cl&rus,  a,  um,  bright  ox  famous 
classiarii,  2,  scaiiien,  men  of  the  Jleet 
classis  (Gen.  Pl.  claBsium),  T),fleet 
clivus,  2,  hill,  do~cn 
cohors  (cohort-),  3,  cohort 
coUi8(Gen.  PI.  collium),  3,  m.,  hill 
coUoco,  I,  I place  [locate] 
colonia,  I,  colony 
coioratus,    a,    um,    sun-hurnt 

[coloured] 
coloro,  I,  I  colour 
coluniba,  i,  dove,  pigeon 
commemoro,    i,    /  mention   ("com- 

memorate] 
commentarii,  2  pl.,  notes,  covimen- 

taries 
comparS,  i,  I get  together,  prepare 
CGUiprobo,  I,  I  approve 
concursio     (-ion),     3,    engagcment 

[ex-cursion] 
condicio  (-ion-),  3,  condition 
condiscipulus,  2,  schoclfellow 
confirmo,  i,  I estahlish  [confirm] 


confusus,  a,  um,  confused 
congregO,     i,    /  gather    togethef 

[congregation] 
consecratus,  a,  um,  consecrated 
consSbrina,  I,  cousin  (§  5) 
consocio,  I,  I  ally 
constantia,  I,  constancy,  firmness 
con-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  /  consist  [con, 

together,  sto,  /  stand]  :  constat 

(3rd  person)  =  /V  knoivn 
consulto,  on  purpose   [by  consulta- 

tion] 
continuus,    a,    um,    continucd,    un- 

interrupted 
contra  (wilh  Acc),  against 
copia,  I,  abundance 

copiam  do,  I give  opportunity 
copiae  {^\\xx.),  forces 
corium,  2,  skin 

corpuB  (corpor-),  3,  body  [corpor-al] 
corvus,  2,  croiv 
creber,  crebra,  crebrum,  crowded 

(Abl.  =with),  frequent 
cremo,  l,  I burn  [cremation] 
creo,  I,  I  create 

crucio,  I,  I  torture  [ex-cruciating] 
crustulum,  2,  cake 
culpo,  I,  I  blame 
cullura,  I,  tillage,  cultivation,  cul 

ture 
cum    (with    Abl.),    together  with 

'vith 
cum,  whcn 
cupide,  eagerly 

cupidus,  a,  um,  desirous,  eager 
cur,  why 
cuia,  I,  care 
CurO,  I ,  /  care  for,  attcnd  to,  pro- 

vide  (§  22) 
cuslos  (cuslud-),  3,  guard,guardian 


de  (with  Abl.),  about,  down  from 

dC-bellr),  i,  I  defcat 

decimus,  a,  um,  tcnth 

dt-clarri,  i,  I  deciare 

declino,  /  turn  aside  [decline] 


D. 


defeclio  (-ion-),  3,  defection 
defcnsor  (defensor-),  3,  dcfcnder 
dclcctanuntum,  2,  delight 
delectS,  i,  J  delight 
delibero,  i,  I  dciiberaie 


148 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


deligO,  I,  I  fasten 

ad  ancoram  deligO,  I  anchor 
demonstro,  i,  I point  out 
deneg5,  i,  I  say  no  [deny] 
densns,  a,  um,  dense,  thick 
deploro,  I,  I  deplore,  lament 
derlvatus,  a,  um,  derived 
de-8um,    de-esse,   de-ful,    /  am 

wanting 
deas,  2,  god 

dexter,  dextra,  dextrnm,  right 
dextra,  i,  right  hand 
dico,  dlcere,  dixl,  3,  I  say 
digitus,  2,yf;/.o'(?r  [digit] 
discipulus,  2,  pupil  [disciple] 
discordia,  i,  quarrel,  discord 
disputo,  l,  I  dispute 
di-sto,  I,  I  am  distant 
difi,  long,  for  a  long  time 
diumus,  a,  um,  ofthe  day 
diversus,  a,  um,  diverse,  different  (a, 
from) 


dO,  dare,  dedi,  /  give,  set,  put  (in 

fugam,  tofiight) 
doctuB,  a,  um,  leamed  [doctor] 
domesticus,  a,  um,  internal  [dom- 

estic] 
domina,  i,  mistress  [dame] 
domus   (irregular,  /),  house,  home 

domi,  at  home 

domum,  homeivards  (home) 
Druidae,  l,  pl.,  Druids 
dubitS,  I,  I  hesitate,  douht 
Dubrae,  I,  pl.,  Dever 
ducentl,  ae,  a,  t-wo  hundred 
dulcis,  3,  adj.,  sweet,  pleasant 
dum,  while 
duo,  dnae,  duo,  two 
duodecimus,  a,  um,  twelfth 
duodesexagesimus,  a,  um,  s8th 
dux  (duc-),  3,  leader,  general 


E. 


ecce,  hehold 

ego,  / 

egregie,  excellently 

eques  (equit-),  3,  horse-soldier 

equito,  i,  I  ride 

equus,  2,  horse 

erro,  i,  /  err 

esca,  lyfood,  eating 

esse,  to  be 

essedarius,  2,  charioteer 

essedum,  2,  chariot 

et,  and : 

et  .  .  .  et,  both  .  .  .  and 
etiam,  also,  even 
euge,  bravo  \  {e  in  Plautus) 


ex  (with  Abl.),  out  offrom 
excavo,  I,  I  excavate 
exclamo,  i,  I  exclaim 
existimo,  i,  /c(?wi/(/fr  [estimate] 
expeditio  (-i5n-),  3,  expedition 
explico,  I,  1  diploy,  arrange 
exploro,  I ,  /  explore 
exporto,  I,  I  export,  carry  out 
expugnO,  I,  I  storm,  take  by  stor^" 
exspectatiS  (ion-),  3,  expectation 
exspecte,  I,  I  extcct,  await 
ex-8t5,    -stare,  -stiti,    /  exist,    re- 

main,  am  extant  (§  39  =  stand 

out) 


F. 


fabric5,  I,  I  manufacture  [fabricate] 
fabula,  I,  play,  drama  [fable] 
facinus  (facinor-),  3,  deed,  achieve- 

ment 
fagus,  2,  f.,  beeck 


fanum,  2,  shrine 
fallgatus,  a,  um,  //m/ [fatigued] 
femina,    i,    woman   [hence  'femin- 
ine'] 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


149 


fenestra,  i,  window 
fera,  i ,  -wild  beast 
fere,  almost,  about 
feriae,  i  pl.,  holidays 
ferlna,  \,flesh  ofwildanimals,  game 
ferox  (feroc-),  3,  adj.,  warlike 
ferratus,  a,  um,  filtedwith  iron 
ferreus,  a,  um,  made  o/iron 
ferus,  a,  urn,  savage 
feetinCS,  i,  I  hurry 
fidus,  a,  \XVA,  faithful 
fii^ura,  i,  figttre 
filia,  I,  d.ttii^hter 
filius,  2  (Voc.  fili),  son 
finis,  3,  eiiJ ;  Plur.  fines,  m., 
(Gen.  finium),  loundaries 
firmiludo  (  tudin-),  ■^,  fir/itness 
firmo,  I,  J  strengthen  [make  firmj 
fl.xvus,  a,  um,  yellow 
tlO,  I,  I blow  (said  of  the  wind) 
Humen  (-min-),  3,  river 
fluvius,  2,  river 


Gallia,  i,  Gaul 

Gallicus,    a,    um,     Gallic :    fretum 

Galiicum,  the  English  channel 
gallina,  i,  hen 
Gallus,  2,  m  Gaul,  an  inhabitant  of 

Gaul 
gallus,  2,  cock 
gaudium,  2,joy,  delight 
gemma,  i,  gem,  preciotts  stoite 
generosus,  a,  um,  nobly  born 
gens  (gent-),  3,  race  [gentile] 


G. 


focus,  2,  hearth 

foedus,  a,  um,  hideotis 

fomia,  i,form,  shape 

formidO,  l,  I fear 

fortasse,  perhaps 

fortis,  3,  adj.,  brave,  strong 

fortiter,  bravcly 

fortuna,  i,  fortune,  fate 

Francogallicus,  a,  um,  French 

frenum,  2,  bridle 

fretum,  2,  channel,  arm  of  the  sea 

frugifer,  fiugifera,  frugiferuni,  fruil- 

ful  [fruit-bearing] 
frtimentum,  2,  com 
frustra,  in  vain 
fuga,  \,flight 
fugo,  I,  I puttoflight,  rout 

fugatus,  a,  um,  routed 
fundamentum,  2,  foundation 
funis  (Gen.    Plur.  funium),   3,   m., 

rope 


genuB  (gener-),  3,  ^/mj' [gener-al] 
Germanicus,  a,  um,  German  (adj.) 
Germanus,  2,  German  (noun) 
gl5ria,  \,  glory,  fame 
Graecia,  i,  Greece 
GraecuB,  a,  um,  Greck 
gramineus,  a,  um,  grassy 
grandis,  3,  adj.,  (5?>  [grand] 
gratuB,  a,  um,  pleasing 
guberno,  i ,  /  steer,  guide  [govern] 
gusto,  I,  /  taste 


H, 


habito,    1,  /  dwell ',    with    Acc,  / 

inhabit 
hasta,  I,  spear 
herba,  \,grass,  herb 
liil)crnia,  I,  Ireland 
llilicrnicus,  a,  um,  Irish 
hic,  here,  at  this  point 
hiema  (hiem),  3,  winter 
Hispania,  1,  Spain 
historicus,  a,  um,  historical 
hodie,   today,   at   the  present   day, 

nowadays 


hodiernus,  a,  um,  of  the  present  day 

homd  (homin),  3,  vian 

hOra,  I,  hour 

hortus,  2,  garden 

hostia   (Gen.    Plur.    hosiium),    3, 

eneiny 
huiusmodi,  ofthis  kind 
humanus,  a,  um,  human,  ('vilized 
humo,  I,  /  bury 


150 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


iam,  alreaJy,  noio,  even 

ianua,  i,  door,  gate 

ibi,  there 

idoneus,  a,  Vkra,fitted,  suitable 

ieiunus,  a,  um,  hungry 

ientaculum,  2,  breakfast 

igitur,  therefore,  then 

ignavus,  a,  um,  co^vardly 

ignoro,  \,  I do  not  kno~u  [ignore] 

ignotus,  a,  um,  unknou/n 

ille,  illa,  illud,  yon,  that  one 

illic,  yonder 

illustro,  I,  I  light  up  [illustrate] 

imber  (imbr-),  3,  shower  ofrain 

immigro,  I,  I  immigrate 

imperStor  (imperator),  3,  general 

[emperor] 
inipcrium,  2,  command\txa^\x€\ 
impero  (with  Dat.),  I itnpose  (upon) 
impiger,      impigra,       impigrum, 

active  (not  sluggish) 
impigre,  actively,  bravely 
impius,  a,  um,  unnattiral  [impious] 
impl6r5,  i,  I  i?nplore 
importo,  i ,  /  import,  carry  in 
impugno,  i,  I  attack 
in  (with  Abl.),  in  or  on 

(with  Acc. ),  itito  or  onto 
incito,  I,  I  urge,  urge  on,  incite 
incola,  i,  inhabitant 
incommodum,  2,  disaster 
incullus,  a,  um,  uncultivated 


inde,  thenct 

infinitus,  a,  um,  infinite 

ingens  (ingent-),  3,  adj.,  huge 

ingratus,  a,   um,  unpleasing,   un- 

grateful 
inhumanus,  a,  um,  uncivilized 
inopia,  i,  'want,  poverty 
inquam,  say  I,  I  say  ;  inquit,  says 

he,  he  says  ;  inquimus,  we  say  ; 

inquiunt,  they  say 
insectatio  (-ion-),  3,  pursuit 
infligniB,  3,  adj.,  distinguished 
in  stO,  -stSre,  -stitl  (with  Dat.),  1 

pursue 
insula,  i,  island 
inter  (with  Acc),  between  or  during 

or  among 
interdum,  sauietimes 
interea,  meanwhile 
interior  (interiOr-),  3,  interior,  inner 
interrogo,  i,  I  ask,  enquire 
intervalhim,  2,  interval 
intra  (wiih  Acc. ),  within 
intro,  I,  I  enter 
irrigo,  I,  I  water  [irrigate],  §6 
ita,  thus 

itaque,  accordingly,  therefore 
iter  (itiner-),  3,  n.,  march 
iterum,  a  second  time 
iudicS,  I,  I  judge 
iustus,  a,  \xm,just,  proper 
iuvat  (3rd  pers.  sing. )  it  delights 


labor  (labOr-),  3,  labotir,  toil 
labOro,  I ,  /  labour,  am  in  difficulties 
laetitia,  \,  delight, pleasure 
lamir.a,  I,  plate 
Latiuus,  a,  um,  Latin 
latus,  a,  um,  wide,  broad 
latus  (later-),  3,  side  [later-al] 
laudandus,  a,  um,  laudable 
laudO,  I,  I praise 
lavO,  I,  1'erf.  irregular,  I  wask 
l§gStU8,  2,  lieutenant-general 
legiO  (iOn-),  3,  legion 


lenis,  3,  adj .,  gentle  [lenient] 
lente,  slowly 

levo,  I,  I  lighten,  relieve  (§  5) 
libenter,  gladly,  wilHngly 
liber,  libr-um,  -i,  -0,  2,  book 
liber,  llbera,  llberum,/r;,f  (some- 

times  with  Abl.  =from) 
liberi,  2  pl.,  children  (properly  an 

adjective  meaning  "  frce  ones," 

i.e.,     children      of     freeborn 

parents) 
lineus,  a,  um,  madt  offiax 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


15« 


lingua,  I,  tongue,  language 
llnum,  2,Jlax 

littera,  i,  leller  (of  the  alphabet) 
Htterarius,    a,    um,   connected  with 

letters  (lilterae),  literary 
litus  (litor-),  3,  coast 
locus,    2,  place   (ph    loca,    «. ),   or 

passage  of  a  book  (pl.  loci,  ///.) 
Londinium,  2,  LonJon 
longe,  far 


longitudo  (-tudin),  3,  lenglh  [longi- 

tude] 
longuB,  a,  um,  loug 
hicrum,  2,  gain,  profit 
lucus,  2,  grove 

ludus,  2,  game  or  elementary  school 
Ifina,  I,  moon 
lupus,  2,  VJOlf 
luscinia,  i,  nightingale 
lui  (luc),  3,  light 


M. 


machina,  i,  machine 
magister,  2,  schoolmaster,  teacher 
magistra,  I,  school-mistress,  teacher 
magnificus,  a,  um,  magnificent 
magnitudo  (-tudin-),  3,  size,  magni- 

titde 
magnopere  ( =  magno  opere),  greatly 
magnus,  a,  um,  great,  large 
maior  (mSiSr-),  3,  leirger,  greater 
mando,  l,  I  commit,  entrust 
mane  (indeclinable),  viorning,  pro- 

perly  in  the  morning 
mare  (dechned  §36),  3,  sea 
margarita,  I ,  pearl  [.Margaret] 
maritimus,  a,  um,  ofthe  sea,  mari- 

time 
materia,  i,  //w^^r  [material] 
mathematicus,  a,  um,  mathematical 
maxime,  chiefly 
me,  me 

mecum,  with  me 
mediocriter,  moderately,  tolerahly 
mediterraneus,  a,  um,  midland,  in- 

land:     mediterranea,    pl.,     n., 

the  midlands 
medius,  a,  um,  mid,  middle 
meinLruni,  2,  limb  [member] 
mercalura,    i,   commerce  [merchan- 

dise] 
inergus.  2,  sca-^uh 
meridianus,    a,   uni,  southcrn  [from 

merldies,  mid-day] 


metallum,  2,  metal 

meus  (Voc.  nii),  mea,  meum,  my 

migro,  l,  I  migrate 

mihi,  to  me 

milea  (mllit-),  3,  soldier 

milia,  3,  miles,  lit.  thousands  {oj 
paces) 

militia,  l,  military  service 

mllito,  l,  I  scrve 

ministro,  I,  /fl//^«i/ [minister] 

mlrus,  a,  um,  wonderful 

miser,  misera,  miserum,  unhappy, 
miserable 

mobihtas  (-tat-),  3,  mohility 

Mona,  I,  Isle  of  Anglesey 

monstrans  (monsUant-),  3,  adj., 
pointing 

monstrO,  i,  I  shoiu,  point 

monumentum,  2,  monument 

mora,  i,  detay 

mortuus,  a,  um,  dead 

mos  (mor-),  3,  custom 

mox,  /;;  due  course  {sooti) 

mullitCRiO  (-tudin-),  3,  multitude 

multus,  a,  um,  much:  multi,  ac,  a, 
many ;  multum  (adv.),  much, 
very  much,  very ;  multo,  by 
much  (multo  maior,  inuch 
greater,  lit.  greater  by  much) 

nirinilio,  3,  buhcark 

murmurO,  I,  I  muimur 

mflrus,  2,  wall 


52 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABVLARY 


N. 


nam,  for 

narro,  i,  I  tell,  narrate 

natiO  (-iOn-),  3,  tribe  [nation] 

nato,  I,  I  swim,  batlte 

natura,  i,  nature 

natus,  a,  um,  bom 

ante  Christum  natum  =B.  C. 

post  Christum  natum  =  A.  D, 
nauta,  i,  sailor 
navigatiO  (-ion-),  3,  voyage 
nSvigium,  2,  vessel,  ship 
navigO,  i,  /53// [navigate] 
nSvis  (Gen.  Plur.  nSvium),  3,  ship; 

navis  longa,  ship  ofwar 
-ne  marks  a  qnestion 
nebula,  i,  cloiid 
nec  (or  neque)  7ior,  and  7iot 

nec  .   .   .  nec,  neither  .   .   .   7ior 
necesse,  necessary  {jyzX.=for') 
Nervii,  a  tribe  in  Belgium 
nidifico,  i,  I  btiild  a  nest 
nidus,  2,  nest 

niger,  nigra,  nigrum,  Wa^^[nigger] 
nihil,  nothing 
nimis,  too 

nisi,  unlesSy  if...  not,  except 
nobis,  to  us 

nobiscum,  witA  us 


noctu,  by  night,  in  the  nighttime 
ni)Cturnus,  a,  um,  of  the  night 
nOmen  (min-),  3,  name  [nominal] 
nominatus,  a,  um,  named 
nOmino,  i,  I  name,  call 
nOn,  7iot 

nondum,  not  yet 

nOn  iam,  no  longer,  not  any  longer 

nOnne  (  =  non  -f  ne),  not  ? 

nonnulll,  ae,  a,  some  [non,  not, 
nuUi,  ;w//tf] 

nSnnumquam,  sometimes  (lit.  not 
never) 
nonus,  a,  um,  ninth 
nos,  ive  or  us,  ourselves 
noster,  nostra,  nostrum,  our 
notus,  a,  um,  kiioivn 
novus,  a,  um,  new 
nox  (noct-),  3,  night 
nudo,  I,  I  strip,  deprivt  (Abl.  =of) 
nulluB,  a,  um,  not  any 
num,  whether,  marking  a  question 
nnmeruB,  2,  number 
nummuB,  2,  coin 
numquam,  never 
nunc,  now 

nuntio,  i,  I  announce 
nuper,  recently,  lately,  not  long  ago 


o. 


obscurO,  I,  I  obscure 

obses  (obsid-),  3,  hostage 

occidens  (occident-),  3,  the  West 

occulto,  I,  I  hide 

occupo,  I,  I  seize  [occupy] 

oceanus,  2,  ocean 

octingenti,  ae,  a,  eight  hundred 

ocloginta,  eighty 

oculuB,  2,  eye 

officium,  2,  dtity 

omnia,    Neut.  Plur.  of  omnes,  all 

things,  everything 
omnino,  altogether 
omnis,  3,  adj.,  every\  Plur.  omnes, 

m.  and  f.,  omnia,  n.,  all 
oner&rius,  a,  um,  of  burden 


onus  (oner-),  3,  hurden  [ex-oner-ate] 
opera,  I,  attention,  study 
oppidum,  2,  town 
opportune,  in  the  nick  of  time 
oppugnO,  I,  J  attack 
optime,  excellently,  hurrah  I 
opus  (oper-),  3,  work  [oper-ation] 

opus  (wiih  Abl.),  med 

quid  opus,  what  med 
Ora,  I,  shore 
orbis,    3,    m.,   circle    [orb] ;    orbis 

terrarum  =  the  world 
ordO  (-din-),  3,  m.,  raw^  [ordin-ary] 
oriens(orient-),  3,  ///<f  .£"aj/[oricntal] 
orlgO  (origin-),  3,  origin 
oriundus,  a,  um,  sprung 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


»53 


umandus,  a,  um.yf/  to  be  equipped 
omatus,  a,  um,  ortiamented 
ornQ,  I,  I  equip,  ad-orn 


0r8,  I,  I  ask,  entreat 

ostrea,  i,  oyster 

ovis  (Gen.  Plur.  ovium),  3,  skeep 


pacatus,  a,  um,  subdued,  pacified 
palus  (palud-),  3,  rnarsh 
paratus,  a,  Mm,  prepared,  ready 
parO,  I,  I  prepare,  prepare  the  way 

for  (§  20) 
pars  (part),  3,  part 
parvus,  a,  um,  small,  little 
patria,  i ,  country,  fatherland 
patruus,  2,  uncle 
pauci.  ae,  ti,few,  afew 
pauluin,    a  little 
pax  (p§c-),  3,  peact 
pecunia,  i,  money 
pedes  (pedit-),  ^,  foot-solJier 
pellis  (Gen.  Plur.  pellium),  3,  skin, 

hidi 
per  (with  Acc),  through,  or  during 
pergrandis,  3,  adj.,  very  big 
pergratus,  a,  um,  very  pleasing 
periculosus,  a,  um,  perilous,  danger- 

ous 
periculum,  2,  peril,  danger 
peritus,  a,  um,  ski//ed  (Gen.  =in) 
perlucidus,     a,     um,     transparent 

[pellucid] 
perturbo,    l,    /  perturb,   disturb, 

throw  into  confusion 
pSs  (ped-),  3,  m.,foot;  pcdibus,  on 

foot 
pharus,  2,  f.,  light-house 
piger,  pigra,  pigrum,  /azy,  s/uggish 
pila,  I,  ba//\^\\\'\ 
pinus,  2  (partly  4),  f.,  pine 
piscatorius,  a,  \xm,  fshing 
plane,  utter/y,  quite 
planta,  i ,  p/ant 
planus,  a,  \xm,flat  [plane] 
plSnus,    a,   um,    with    Gen.   /«//, 

wilh  Abl.  fi//ed 
plerumque,  most/y,  genera//y 
plumbum,  2,  /ead 
plus  (plur-),  more  [hence  '  Plural '] 
pluvia,  I,  rain 
po6ta,  I,  poet 


pSmum,  2,  app/e 

pondus  (pondcr-),  3,  ■weight 

populuB,  2,  tribe  [a  people] 

porcus,  2,  pig  [pork] 

portO,  I ,  /  carry 

poBSum  (  =  pot-sum),  p)osse(  =  pot 

esse),  potuT,  I  am  ab/e 
post  (with  Acc),  after,  behind 
postquam,  after  (  =  when) 
poatridie,  on  the  next  day 
poatulO,  I,  I  demand 
praecipito,  i,  //:«/-/ [prccipitate] 
praecipuus,    a,    um,    especia/,   par- 

ticu/ar 
praeclSruB,  a,  xxm,  famous 
praeda,  1,  prey,  booty 
praefectus,  2,  officer  [prefect] 
praefectus  classis,  admira/ 
praeparo,  l,  I prepare 
prae-sto,   -stare,    -stiti,    /  perform, 

exhibit 
prae-sum,    -esse,    -fui    (wiih    Dat.), 

/  am  in  command  of 
praetcrea,  besides 
prandium,  2,  /umh 
pretium,  2,  price 
primo,  at  first 
primus,  a,  um,  yfr.f/ 
princeps  (princip-),  3,  prince 
prior  (prior-),  ^,  former  [prior] 
prO  (with  Abl.),  instead  of,  for 
procella,  l,  sterm 
proconsul,  3,  proconsu/,  governor 
procul,  far 
proelium,  2,  beUt/e 
profundus,  a,  um,  deep  [profound] 
promunturium,  2,  promontory 
prope  (with  Acc),  ruar 
properO,  i,  I  hasten 
propinquus,  a,  um,  neighbouring 
propior,  propius,  nearer 
propositum,  2,  propcsa/ 
propter  (wilh  Acc),  on  atcourti  ef 
propulso,  I,  I  drive  back 


154 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULARY 


prospere,  success/ully 

prO  sum,    -esse,    -ful  (with    Dat.)) 

/  am  helpfnl,  do  good 
provoIO,  I,  I  dash/orth 
proximus,  a,  um,  nearest,  next,  last 
pruina,  i,frost 
puella,  I ,  girl 
puer,  2,  boy 
pugna,  lyfight,  battlt 


pugnans  (pugnant-),  3,  adj.,/^A//«^ 

pugno,  I,  I fight 

pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum,yf«tf, 

beautiful,  handsome 
pulchre,  beautifully 
puppis   (Gen.    Plur.    puppium),    3, 

stern,  poop 
puto,  I,  I fancy,  think,  suppose 


qnam,  how,  as,  than 

quando,  when 

quantopere,  how  much 

quare  ( =  qua  re,  by  whal  thing\  7vhy 

quartus,  a,  \xm,  fourth 

quattuor,  fdur 

quattuordecim,  fourteen 

quia,  because 

quingenti,  ae,  s.,five  hun  red 

quinquagesimus,  a,  um,  fijtieth 


qmnque,  five 

quintus,  a,  \xm,fifth 

quo,  whilher,  to  which 

quod,  that 

quOmodS,  how 

quondam,  once  on  a  time,  formerly 

quoque,  too,  also,  even 

tum  quoque,  then  too,  even  then 
quota  hora  est  ?  what  o'clock  is  it  ? 

quota  hora,  at  what  o\l»ck  ? 


R. 


recreo,  l,  Irefresh  (nie,  myselj) 

recte,  rightly 

redambulo,  i,  I  walk  back 

regalis,  3,  adj.,  royal 

reglna,  i,  queen 

regulus,  2,  ruler,  petty  kittg 

reliquiae,  I,  pl.,  relics 

reliquus,  a,  um,  the  rest,   the  re- 

maining 
remigo,  i,  I  row 
remotus,  a,  um,  remote 
remuB,  2,  oar 
reparo,  l,  I  refit,  repair 
reportO,  i ,  /  carry  eff  (or  back) 
reservO,  I,  I  reserve 
revera,  really 
revoco,   i,  I  recall 


rex  (reg-),  3,  king 
Rhenus,  2,  the  Rhine 
ripa,  I,  bank 
rivus,  2,  stream  [river] 
robur  (robor-),  3,  oak,  slrength 
rSbuatus,  a,  um,  robusl,  sturdy 
R5ma,  I,  Rome 
ESmSnuB,  a,  um,  Roman 
rosa,  I,  rose,  rose-tree 
rostrum,  2,  beak,  ram 
rota,  I,  wheel 
ruber,  rubra,  rubrum,  red 
ruinae,  i,  pl.,  ruins 
rusticus,  a,  um,  rustic 
Rulupiae,  l,  pl.,  Richhrough 
Rutuplnus,    a,    um,     belonging    to 
Richborough 


Bacer,  sacra,  sacrum,  sacred 

sacra,  pl.  n.,  sacred  rites 
■atrificC,  I,  I  satrifict 


s- 


saeculum,  2,  century 

BAepe,  often 

■aevuB,  a,  um,  savage,  cru*l 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABUt^ARY 


^l^ 


iaffilfa,  I,  arrow 
salutO,  I,  I  salute,  greet 
satiatus,  a,  um,  satisfied 
satia,  sufficiently,  enough 
scapha,  I,  boat  [skifT] 
schola,  I,  school ;  pl.  lessons 
scientia,  i,  science,  knowledge 
Bcopulus,  2,  cliff,  rock 
ScOiicus,  a,  uni,  Scottish 
scri[)lito,  I,  I  write,  scribhle 
se,    hiiiiself,   themselves :    inter   se, 
ainong  thcinselves,  with  one  antlhc 
secundus,  a,  um,  second 
seJ,  bitt 

senteniia,  i,  opinion 
sCparo,  I,  I separate 
scptentriOnCs,  the  North 
septimus,  a,  um,  sez'enth 
scptingentl,  ae,  a,  seven  hundred 
Bepulchrum,  2,  toinb,  septdchre 
serenus,  a,  um,  clear  [serene] 
serO,  late 

servO,  I,  I  save,  preserve,  watch 
servuB,  2,  siave 
sescenti,  ae,  a,  six  hundred 
sl,  if 

sic,  so,  thus,  as  foUows 
Bicut,  as  (lit.  so  as,just  aj) 
signum,  2,  si^n,fiag 
silva,  I,  wood,forest 
simulficrum,  2,  image 
8ine  (with  Abl.),  without 
situs,  a,  um,  situated 
sive  .   .   .   sive,  whether  .  ,  .  or 
socictas  (-tat-),  3»  alliance  [society] 


sOl,  3,  the  sun 

solum,  2,  soi/ 

BOlum,  on/y 

somnio,  i,  I dream 

sonus,  2,  sound 

spectO,  I,  I  see,  watch,  gate  ai 

specula,  i,  watch-tower 

BperO,  I,  I  hope 

splendor  (splendOr-),  3,  sp/endour 

spumifer,    spumifera,    spumiferum, 

foainy     [spuma,     foam,      -fer, 

bearing'^ 
spiimo,  I,  I  foam 
slabilitas  (-lat-)  3,  slabilily 
Btatio  (-ion-)  3,  station,  roaJstead 
slalura,  I,  hcight,  stature 
stella,  I,  star 
8to,  stSre,  Btetl,  i,  I  stand 
studiosus,  a,  \xm,  fond,  studious 
stultitia,  i,fo//y 
Bub   (wilh  Abl.),  under,  down  in  ; 

(with  Acc),  dowH  into,  down 

to,  up  to 
subito,  sudden/y 
subministro,  i,  I  supp/y 
sudis  (Gen.  Plur.  sudium),  3,  stake 
sum,  eBse,  ful,  I  am 
summus,  a,  um,  chief 
Buper  (with  Acc),  over,  above 
superior    (superiOr-),    3,    previous, 

past ;  superior,  victorious 
Bupero,  I,  I  surpass,  overcome 
BUUB,  a,  um,  his  (or  //;.;  own),  their 

(or   their  own)  ;   sui,    his   (or 

their)  own  men 


T. 


taberna,  l,  inn  [tavern] 

tam,  so  :  tam  .  .  quam,  so  .   .  as 

tamen,  nevertheless,  hoivcver 

Tamesa,  I,  m.,   I hames 

tandem,  at  /ength 

tantum,  so  much,  or  on/y 

te,    tliee,  you ;    tecum,    with   thee, 

with  you 
tegimen  (-min-),  3,  covering 
tempero,  i,  I  coo/,  temper 


tempestas  (-tat-),  3,  tempest,  weather 
tempus  (tempor-),  3,  time  [tempor- 

ary] 
tenebrae,  I,  Plur.,  darkmss 
terra,  i,  /and 
tertius,  a,  um,  third 
tertius  decimus,  thirteenth 
testimonium,  2,  testimony,  evidenct 
testudO    (tudin-),    3,    tortoise-she//, 

she/ter 


■56 


ALPHABETICAL    VOCABULAR  Y 


tintinnabuluin,  2,  bell 
tonans  (tonanl-),  3,  adj.,  thundering 
tormentum,  2,  hiirling  machine 
tot  (indeclinable  adj.),  so  many 
tOtuB,  a,  um  (Gen.  and  Dat.  Sing. 

irregular),  whole 
tranquillus,  a,  um,  cabn,  tranquil 
trans  (wiih  Acc),  across 
transportS,  i,  I  Iransport 
trecentl,  ae,  a,  three  hunJred 
tr68  (m.,  f.),  tria  (n.),  three 
tributum,  2,  trihute 
Trinobantes,    3,   plur.,   a    tribe    in 

Essex 


triplex  (triplic-),  3,  adj.,  triple 

triquetrus,  a,  um,  triangular 

triumpho,  l,  I  triutnph,  exult 

tropacum,  2,  trophy 

trucido,  I,  I  slaughter,  murder 

tu,  thou,  you 

tum,  then  (=ai  that  titne  or  there- 

upon) 
tumulus,  2,  mound 
turbulentus,  a,  um,  rottgh,  turhulent 
turris  (Gen.  Plur.  turrium),  3,  turret 
tutuB,  a,  um,  safe 
tuuB,  a,  um,  thy,  your 


u. 


ubi,  where 

ulluB,  a,  um,  any  (Gen.  and  Dat. 

Sing.  irregular) 
uhnus,  2,  f.,  ehn-tree 
umbra,  i,  shade,  shadow 
una,  together;  unacum,  togetherwith 
unda,  i,  wave 
unde,  whence 
undecimus,  a,  um,  eleventh 
flniversuB,     a,     um,    all    together 

[universal] 


anuB,  a,  um  (Gen.  and  Dat.  Sing. 

irregular),  one 
urba  (urb-),  3,  city  [urban] 
urna,  l,  urn 
ursus,  2,  bear 

usitatus,  a,  um,  used,  usual,  common 
usque  ad,  right  on  till 
ut,  how  or  as 
iitili»,  3,  adj.,  useful 


V. 


vacca,  I,  cov) 

vaco,  I,  I  amjree  [vacant] 

vadum,  2,  shallow plcue,  shoal,ford 

validus,  a,  um,  strong 

vallum,  2,  rampart 

varius,  a,  um,  varied 

vaBto,  I,  I  lay  waste  [de-vast-ate] 

vastus,  a,  um,  wild,  waste  [vast] 

vehiculum,  2,  carriage  [vehicle] 

vel,  or 

velum,  2,  sail ;  vela  dare,  to  set  sail 

velut,  as,  even  as  [vel,  even  ;  ut,  aj] 

venaticus,    a,    um,    connected    with 

hunling 
Vcneti,  2,  pl.,  a  tribe  on  the  Wcst 

Coast  of  Gaul 


venia,  l,  pardon 

Venta  Belgaium,  i,  IVinchester 

ventus,  2,  wind 

venum-do,    -dare,    -dedi,    /  sell 

\yk\\\xm,  for  sale  \  do,  I offer^^ 
v6ruB,  a,  um,  true;  vera,  the  truth 

(lit.     true    things)  ;     ver5,    in 

truth,  indeed 
vesper,   2,  evening  or  evening  star 

[vespers] 
vester,  vestra,  vestrum,  your  (of 

sevcral  persons) 
vesligium,  2,  vestige,  trate 
veslimentum,  2,garment  [vestmentj 
vetcranus,  a,  um,  veteran,  old 
vcto,  I,  I forbid 


ALPHABETICAL     VOCABULARY 


»57 


vexC,  I,  L  annoy,  vex 

via,  I ,  r»ad,  way  ;  d$  via,  from  the 
road;  in  viam  me  do,  L  give 
myself  to  the  road,  L  start ; 
intcr  viam,  on  the  way 

viclito,  I,  I  live 

victor  (victOr-),  3,  victor 

Ticteria,  I,  victory 

vicus,  2,  village 

vigintl  (indeclinable),  twenty 

viila,  I,  country-house,  villa 

viola,  I,  Triolet 

violo,  I,  l  violai4 


vir,  2,  man 

virtus  (virtQt-),  3,  pliuk,   couragt 

[virtue] 
visitd,  I ,  /  visit 
vita,  I,  life 
vitS,  I,  L  avoid 
vitrea,  2,  pl.  n.,  glass  vesseh 
vitrum,  2,  woad 
vii,  scarcely,  hardly 
vobis,  to  yoit ;  vobiscuni,  witfi  you 
volito,  I,  L fly 
\b%,  ypit  fplural) 
vulims  (vulner),  3,  wound  [vulner- 

able] 


W.  J»lly  &*  Stnt,  Printers.  38  B^idge  Strttt.  Aitrdttn 


ORA  MARITIMA  SERIES 

EDITED    BY 

Professor  E.  A.  SONNENSCHEIN,  D.Litt. 

Published  by  Messrs.  Swan  Sonnenschein  &  Co.,  Ltd.,  London,  and 
The  Macmilt.an  Co.,  New  York. 

Each  of  ihe  Readers  in  this  series  consists  of  a  continuous 
story  written  in  the  language  to  be  studied,  and  so  constructed  as 
to  form  the  basis  of  a  systematic  study  of  Grammar.  They  thus 
combine  the  interest  and  vitality  of  a  real  story  with  a  thorough 
training  in  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  concerned. 

The  seiies  at  present  contains  the  following  volumes  : — 

ORA  MARITIMA:  a    Latin    Story    for    Be- 

ginners,  with  Grammar  and  Exercises.     By  Professor  SON 
NENSCHEIN,     (Thirtieth  Thousand,  croffn  %t'0,  price  2/.,  subject 
to  discount.) 

The  scene  of  the  story  is  laid  on  the  South  Coast  of  England, 
and  includes  a  sketch  of  the  ancient  Britons  and  of  Ca;sar's 
invasions  of  Britain. 

OPINIONS 

"  The  book  is  just  Al,  clearly  right  in  conception  and  admirably 
execiUed." — P.  A.  Barnett,  M.A.,  H.IVI.  Chief  Inspeclor  for  the  Training 
of  Teachers. 

"  We  have  adopted  both  Ora  Maritima  and  Pro  Patria  in  our  Latin 
classes  at  Manchester  Grammar  School,  and  have  never  had  reason  to 
regret  Iheir  adoption.  Both  books  have  interest  and  continuily,  and  both 
lend  themselvcs  excellenlly  to  oral  practice." — J.  L.  Paton,  M.A.,  High 
Master  of  the  Manchester  Grammar  School. 

"  The  most  altractive  introduction  to  Latin  that  has  come  under  my 
notice,  and  I  have  seen  most  of  them  in  the  secondary  schools  which  I 
inspect." — JOHN  Keru,  LL.D.,  late  H.M.  Chief  Inspector  of  Schoois  and 
Training  Colleges  in  Scotland. 

"  It  makes  a  new  departure  in  the  teaching  of  Latin  thit  ought  to  be 
productive  of  great  good.  I  am  in  entire  sympathy  with  its  meihod." — 
A.  E.  ScouGAL,  H.M.  Senior  Chief  Inspector  of  Schools 'n  Scotland. 

"  I  have  used  Ora  Maritima  in  actual  teaching,  and  have  found  it  both 
interestingand  instructive  to  the  pupil." — ProfessorJ.  P.  PojTGATE,  Litt.D. 

"  Ora  Maridma  proves  an  idcal  book  for  a  first  reader." — VV.  H.  D. 
RousE,  Litt.  D.,  Head  Master  of  the  Perse  School,  Cambridge. 


"  Exactly  what  is  needed  to  strike  a  mean  Vjctween  the  wholly  conversa- 
tional  method,  which  means  no  grammar,  and  the  solely  grammatical 
mcthod,  which  means  no  specch  or  life." — Sybil  F.  Partriugk,  Principal 
of  St.  Mary's  Hall,  Liverpool. 

"  This  is  a  charming  book.  We  know  no  better  epithet  by  which  to 
descrilie  such  an  introduction  to  the  Latin  tongue.  .  .  .  It  is  giving  a 
strong  recommendation  to  say,  as  we  gladly  do,  that  our  author  has  given 
us  the  ideal  book  which  he  formerly  described." — Sccondary  Educaticn 

"  VVe  can  conceive  no  more  delightful  book  for  the  induction  of  youth 
into  the  paths  of  Latin." — The  Monthly  Register. 

"  An  interesling  experiment,  ably  carried  ow\.."—Journal  of  Education. 

"  It  aims  al  teaching  a  little  thoroughly,  and  it  succeeds." — School 
World. 

"  An  cxlremely  simplc  and  interesting  book." — Literary  World. 

"  The  drill  exercises  are  specinlly  to  be  commended.  In  the  presence 
of  the  impending  campaign  against  classical  education,  it  behoves  its  de- 
fenders  to  furbish  up  their  weapons." — Saturday  Review. 

"  Ora  Maritima  does  for  Latin  what  the  modern  oral  methods  do  for 
French  and  German,  i.e.,  it  makes  the  beginner  realise  that  the  language 
13  really  a  vehicle  of  expression,  whereby  common-sense  nolions  can  be 
conveyed.  From  personal  experience  I  can  testify  how  a  few  weeks  are 
sufficient  to  gain  this  all-important  idea  ;  and  it  is  worlh  adding  that  in  a 
school  which  I  have  recently  inspected  a  small  hoy  of  eleven  employed  his 
leisure  time  in  working  ihrough  Ora  Maritima  to  the  end,  and  then  canie 
to  his  master  for  the  sequel  Pro  Patria.  There  was  no  need  to  lell  that 
boy  that  Latin  is  someihing  more  ihan  a  phalanx  of  declinable  nouns  and 
verbs." — Alfred  Hughes,  M.A.,  Professor  of  Educationin  the  University 
of  Hirmingham. 

PRO   PATRIA  :  a  Latin  Story,  being  a  sequel 

to  Ora  Afariti»ia,  with  Grammar  and  E.\ercises  to  the  end 
of  the  Regular  Accidence.  By  Professor  Sonnenschein. 
{Tenth  Thousand,  croiun  %to, pricg  2s.  6d.,  subject  to  discount.) 

The  story  includes  a  sketch  of  the  history  of  Britain  under  the 
Romans  and  Saxons,  down  to  the  introduction  of  Christianity. 
The  latter  part  of  the  story  recounts  the  history  of  the  Boer  War 
down  to  June,  1900. 

OPINIONS 

"The  books  are  admirable,  and  under  the  guidance  of  a  skilful  teacher 
their  use  in  class  is  followed  by  excellent  results. — Professor  Michael 
E.  Sadler,  LL.D.,  Manchester. 

"  I  have  had  both  books  prescribed  for  use  in  our  earliest  standards. 
They  were  acknowledgcd  by  ihe  Committee  which  passed  them  to  be 
unequalled  for  the  inieresting  way  in  which  they  presented  the  subject. 
I  think  no  praise  is  too  high  for  them." — W.  G.  Wedderspoon,  M.A., 
H.M.  Inspector  of  European  Schools  and  Training  Colleges,  Burma. 

2 


"  I  have  started  my  own  small  boys  in  Latin  with  Oia  Marititna  and 
Pio  Patria,  and  am  delighted  with  both  books  :  they  irdicate  a  method 
which  is  attractive  to  th;^  child  without  being  superficial." — Sir  Arthur 
IIORT,  M.A. ,  Ilarrow  School. 

"  In  a  long  experience  I  have  found  Pro  Patria  quite  the  best  book 
which  I  have  ever  come  across  for  arousing  and  sustaining  the  interest 
of  small  boys  in  their  elementary  stage  of  Latin  Translation." — The  Rev. 
Piiii.ir  Crick,  M.A.,  St.  Ronan's,  Worthing. 

THE   GREEK  WAR   OF   iNDEPEND- 

ENCE.  The  Story  of  the  War  of  Indcpcndence  ('1821- 
1827)  is  told  in  classical  Greek  for  the  use  of  beginners,  with 
Notes  and  Exercises.  By  C.  D  Chamber§,  M.A.  {jCrown 
8tio,  price  y.,  suhject  to  disrount^ 

OPINIONS 

"  Felicitous  in  design  and  able  in  excculion.  There  is,  in  our  opinion, 
a  future  for  books  of  this  type — books  classical  in  language  and  m  ilern 
in  subject-matter.  As  a  specimen  of  Mr.  Chambers'  sUill  in  reprodiicing 
the  grave  Thucydidean  slyle,  the  account  of  Byron's  arrival  in  Greece  and 
of  his  too  early  death  is  e\ce\\en\.."—JouriialofEdiicaiion. 

"  Most  ably  planned  and  most  successfully  executed.  It  gives  reality 
and  intcrest  to  the  early  study  of  Greek." — Educational  Times. 

"  A  mo>t  vahiable  schoolbook.  Tlie  narrative  \->  bright  and  interest- 
ing,  and  well  illustraled  wilh  maps  and  phoiographs.  \Ve  strongly 
recommend  the  book  to  all  schoolmastcrs."—  '1  he  Oxford  Magazine. 

"  The  tcxt  makes  a  capiial  reader." — Guardian. 

JUST  PUBLISHED 
AM    RHEIN  :   a  German  Story  for  Beginners, 

with  Grammar  and  E.xercises  in  Conversation,  Free  Com- 
position,  and  Translation.  By  Professor  K.ARL  WlCHMANN, 
Ph.D.     {Crow?t  ?)V0,  price  2s.,  subject  to  discount.) 

The  scene  of  the  story  is  laid  in  a  country  parsonage  on  the 
Rhine  ;  in  the  latter  part  of  the  book  tlie  story  of  Siegfried  and 
the  Niljclungen  is  recounted. 

/.\"  rREF.l IL'lTln.y 
A    FRENCH    STORY    FOR    BEGINNERS,    on 

similar  lincs  to  thc  ahovc. 

3 


^  PARALLEL 
GRAMMAR    5ERIE5. 


EDITED   Br 


Ppofessop  E.  A.  SONNENSCHEIN,  D.Uitt.  OXon. 


RECENT  OPINIONS  FRO.H 

The  Head-master  of  King  Edward's  School,  Birmingham  ; 
The  Head-mistress  of  the  Wimbledon  High  School  for  Girls  : 

"  The  Latin  Accidence  of  the  Parallel  Grammir  Series  is  in  use  through- 
out  the  King  EdArard's  School,  Birminghara,  and  the  Greek  Accideoce  oa  the 
Classical  Side.  I  am  dislinct.ly  of  opinion  that  one  and  the  same  Accidence 
should  be  prescnbed  in  every  schaol  learning  the  language,  and  that  the 
Parallel  Grammar  Accidences  are  the  right  ones  to  prescribe.  Gram- 
matical  curiosities  are  relegatea  to  their  proper  place,  and  the  normal  in- 
flexione  of  the  language  are  presentcd  in  a  clear  and  orderly  manner  without 
Bacrificing  practical  convenience  to  the  suppoaed  reeiuirements  of  scieutific 
philology.  When  the  Greek  and  the  Latin  Accidence  of  this  series  are  used 
Bide  by  side,  the  f  urther  esonomy  eflected  by  the  '  Parallel '  system  is 
realised." — R.  Cary  Gilson,  M  A.,  Head-master  of  the  Schools  of  King 
Edward  VL  in  Birminghara  ;  late  Assistant  Maater  at  Harrow,  and  Fellow  of 
Triuity  CoUege,  Cambridge.     (Feb.  26th,  1904.) 

"The  Parallel  Grammari — English,  Latin,  Greek,  French,  and  German — 
have  been  used  in  this  School,  each  from  the  time  of  ita  publication.  These 
Grammars  are  acknowledged  to  be  in  the  front  rauk  as  regards  scholarship, 
and  they  have  also  thc  merits  of  clearness  and  compactness. — The  Parallel 
method  is  important  as  leadiug  to  a  real  grasp  of  principles  and  economising 
the  learner'8  time.  The  result  of  using  the  Parallel  Grammirs  exclusively 
has  in  the  case  of  this  School  been  altogether  satisfactory,  and,  where  pupiU 
of  linguistio  talent  were  concerned.  adrairablysuccessfuL" — Editu  Hastings, 
Head-mistresa  of  the  Wimbledon  High  School  for  Girls.     (Feb.  23rd,  1904.) 

SELECr  OPINIONS  ON  THB  SERIES  AS  A  WHOLE. 

'•  We  have  for  8ome  years  been  using  the  Parallel  Grammars  and  ReaJera 
and  Writers  intended  to  be  studied  along  with  thera.  We  were  led  to  intro- 
duce  these  text-books  from  a  sense  of  the  souidness  of  tbe  educational  prin- 
ciples  on  which  they  were  based ;  experience  has  now  tau.^ht  m  to  value  them 
also  for  the  care  and  consistency  with  which  these  principles  are  carricd  out. 
We  are  convinccd  that  it  is  an  incalculable  gain  to  the  c.iuse  of  systematic 
instruction  in  our  school  that  we  are  usiug  books  which  enable  us  to  preserve 
uniformity  in  the  grammar  teachiug  of  the  languages,  as  well  as  to  connect 
coherently  translation  and  composition  with  this  gramraar  tcaching." — The 
Rev.  A.  JamsonSmith,  U.A.,  Head-masterof  K.E.S.,CampHill,  Birmingham. 


"  After  recommending  the  Parallel  Gramviar  Seriet  in  many  quartere,  I  can- 
not  remember  any  one  who  was  disappointed,  or  to  whom  the  working  out  of 
the  same  system  through  various  languages  did  not  come  as  something  of  a 
revelation,  for  which  tbey  were  intensely  grateful.  I  am  sure  that  no  teacher 
who  had  once  tried  the  effect  of  their  arrangement  of  Conditional  Sentencet 
as  against  the  traditional  arrangement  could  be  blind  to  the  superiority  of  the 
former." — W.  H.  Seckeb,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  Aysgarth  School,  Yorkshire. 

"  A  year  ago  I  expressed  my  unqualified  approval  of  the  Parallel  Orammar 
Series  ;  since  then  my  admiration  for  it  has  only  increased,  in  proportion  as  I 
have  more  fully  understood  the  principles  on  which  it  is  based  and  their  appli- 
cation.  Mr.  Sonnenschein  has  deserved  well  of  his  country  in  taking  tlie 
initiative  in  this  work,  which  he  has  succeeded  in  carrying  to  a  happy  is^ue. 
Shall  we  ever  have  a  similar  series  for  our  own  country  ?  That  day,  the 
teaching  of  languages  will  have  taken  an  immense  step  forward." — Dr.  J. 
Kkelhof,  Professor  at  the  Athdn^e  Koyal,  Tongrefl,  Belgium,  in  Revue  de 
Vtnstruction  publique  (Translated). 

"  One  of  the  most  pressing  needs  of  the  day,  in  view  of  the  muUiplication 
of  school  Bubjects  and  the  increased  strain  which  it  puts  upon  the  pupil,  is 
concentration  and  simplification  in  the  methods  of  teaching.  What  we  have 
lost  in  extension  we  niust  gain  in  intention,  as  the  logicians  would  say.  And 
among  the  attempts  which  are  being  made  to  meet  this  demand,  a  high  place 
must  be  accorded  to  the  movement  started  in  this  country  sorre  years  ago  for 
unification  in  the  field  of  grammar  teaching.  Grammars  are  many,  but 
grammar  is  one  ;  that  is  to  say,  though  the  varielies  of  usage  in  different 
languages  are  infinitely  numerous,  it  is  possible  to  treat  them  from  a  common 
point  of  view — to  classify  them  on  the  basis  of  a  common  scheme  of  analysis 
and  terminology.  The  gain  to  the  teacher  ought  to  be  enormous.  Instead  of 
re  classifying  the  facts  of  syntax  for  each  separate  language  according  to  the 
sweet  will  of  the  framers  of  individual  grammars,  a  single  classification  serves 
for  all  the  languages  to  be  learned  ;  and  this  scheme,  by  repetition  in  connec- 
tion  with  each  new  language  studied,  becomes  part  aad  parcel  of  the  mental 
outfit  of  the  pupil — a  solid  rock  on  which  he  stands  firm  in  face  of  the  be- 
wildering  complexities  of  human  speech.  The  old  method  involved  a  continual 
re-adjustment  of  the  register  ;  and  its  evila  were  many,  as  Matthew  Arnold 
recognised.  In  our  own  time  a  serious  attempt  has  been  made  to  remedy  its 
defects  in  Professor  Sonnenschein'»  Parallel  Grammar  Series.^' — Literature, 
Feb.  lOth,  1900. 

"  We  have  had  frequent  occasion  to  express  our  opinion  of  the  varioua 
volumes  in  this  very  useful  series,  and  of  the  general  features  which  charac- 
terise  them  all  ;  their  spirit  and  system  are  now  so  well  known  to  all  teachers 
that  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  repeat  those  observations.  The  principle  of 
familiarising  a  pupil  with  passages  for  translation  before  he  has  mastered 
many  details  of  grammar,  of  bringing  him  to  a  knowledge  of  rulca  through 
the  language  from  which  experience  collects  them,  rather  than  equipping  him 
with  a  mass  of  words  and  forms  long  before  he  meeta  them  in  the  literature — 
this  principle  is  gradually  growing  to  be  more  and  more  widely  acknowledged 
as  a  sound  one.  Few  can  doubt  the  very  great  advantage  of  having  some 
general  principles  established,  which  can  be  illustrated  in  different  languages, 
either  by  way  of  similarity  or  contraat.  It  is  on  this  system  of  proceeding 
from  the  known  to  the  unknown  that  the  Parallel  Grammar  Series  is  baaed." — 
Educational  Review, 


I^  GREEK. 

Qreek  Qrammar.  By  Prof,  E.  A.  Sonnenscheix,  D.Litt.,  Oxon., 
Uaiversity  of  Hirmingham.  4-<.  6il. ;  or  (separately),  Accidencc  (inchuling 
Supplenwjit  on  irregularities  in  Declension  andComparison),  29.  ;  Supplement 
aloQe,  G(i.;  Syntax,  23.  Gd. 

A  Parallel  of  Greek  and  Latin  Syntax.  By  C.  II.  St.  L.  Russell, 
M.A.,  Asaistant  ilaster  at  Clifton  College.     33.  6d. 

First  Qreek  Reader  and  Wrlter.  By  J.  E.  Sandvs,  Litt.D.,  Public 
Oiator  in  the  Uuiversity  of  Ciimbridge.     2s.  Cd. 

LATIN. 

Latla  Qrammar.  Ey  Prof.  E.  A.  Sonnekschein,  D.Litt.,  O.xon.,  Univer- 
sity  of  Birmiagham.    3s. ;  or  (separately),  Accidence,  Is.  6d. ;  Syntax,  Is.  Gd. 

Flrst  Latln  Reader  and  Wrlter.     By  C.  M.  Di.x,  M.A.,  Oxon.    23. 

Second  Latin  Reader  and  Wrlter.     By  C.  M.  Dix,  M.A.     la.  6d. 

Third  Latin  Reader  aad  Wrlter.     ByC.  M.  Di.x,  M.A.     2i. 

Fourth  Latin  Reader  and    Writer  {"  Llvy   Lessons  ").      By  J.   C. 

NICOL,  M.A.,Caatab.,  late  Fellow  of  Trinity  Hall,  Head-master  of  Ports- 
moiith  Grammar  School,  and  the  Rev.  J.  HUNTER  Smith,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  late 
Aasistant  Master  in  King  Edward'8  School,  Birmingham.     23. 

ENGLISH. 

Eagllsh  Grammar.  By  J.  II.vll,  M.A.,  Head-ma.ster  of  the  Hulme 
Grammar  School,  ManchcBter  ;  Miss  A.  J.  CoopEB,  F.C.P. ;  and  the  Editob 
OF  THE  Seiues.     28.  ;  or  (separately),  Accidence,  Is.  ;  Analysis  and  Syntax, 

l8. 

Advaaced  Eaglish  Syatax.  By.  C.  T.  Onions,  M.A.,  Lond  ,  of  theStaff 
of  the  Oxford  English  Dictionary.     28.  6d.     Second  Edition. 

Engllsh  Examples  aad  Exerclses.  Part  I.,  by  Miss  M.  A.  Woods.  Is. 
Part  II.,  by  Miss  A.  J.  COOPER,  F.C.P.     Is. 

Steps  to  Eagllsb  Parslag  and  Aaalysls.      By   Miss  E.   M.   Rams.-vy 

and  Miss  C.  L.  Hamsay.  Vol.  I.,  Elementary,  Is.  Od.  Vol.  IL,  Further 
Exercites,  Is.  6d. 

FRENCH. 

Freach  Grammar.  By  L.  M.  Moriakty,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  Assistant  Master  at 
Harrow  ;  late  Professor  of  French  in  King'8  College,  London.  33.,  or 
(separately),  Accidence,  Is.  6d.  ;  Syntax,  Is.  6d. 

Preparatory  French  Course.  By  Miss  A.  M.  Zweifel.  Is.  6d.  New 
edition,  revised  and  largely  re-written,  1903. 

Flrst  French  Reader  and  Writer.  By  R.  J.  Moeich,  late  Assistant 
Maater  at  Clifton,  and  W.  S.  Lyon,  M.A.,  Oxon.     2s. 

tSs'  Fop  Revised   Edition  of  this  Work,  see  below. 
New  Flrst  French  Reader  and  Writcr.     By    l^iortssor  R.   J.  MORICU, 
University  of  Graz.     2s. 


Second  French  Reader  and  Wrlter.     By  ProfeBsor  P.  E.  E.  BAnBlEB, 

UQivursity  College,  Cardiff.     2s. 

Third  French  Reader  and  Writer.      By  L.  Baebe,  B.A  ,  Head-master 

<jf  the  Modern  Language  Department  ia  the  Glasgow  Academy.     2s. 

Advanced  French  Composition.  By  TI.  E.  Berthon,  Hon.  M.A  , 
Oxon.,  Taylorian  Teacher  of  French  in  the  Uuiversity  of  Ojcfurd,  and  C.  T. 
Onioxs,  M.A.,  Lond.     23.  Gd. 

GERMAN. 

Oerman  Grammar.  By  Prof.  Kuso  Meyer,  Ph.D.,  Univcrsity  of  Liver- 
pool.     3s.  ;  or  (separately),  Accidence,  Is.  6d.  ;  Syntax,  Is.  Gd. 

First  German  Readcr  and  Writer.  By  the  Editoe  of  the  Sebies. 
l8.  6d. 

Second  Gcrman  Reader  and  Writer.  By  (he  Rev.  W.  S.  Macgowax, 
M. A.,  LL.U.,  Priucii»al  of  St.  Andrevv's  CoUege,  Grahaujstown,  Cape 
Colony.     2s. 

Third  Oerman  Reader  and  Writer.  By  Prof.  GEonoE  Fiedler, 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Birmingham.     2s. 

Fourth  German  Writer.  By  R.  Gordo.v  Ilouxn,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  Moden 
Language  Master  iu  Bromsgrove  Scuool.     2-*. 

In  Preparation. — Advanced  German  Compositioa.  By  Prof.  Kcno 
Meyer,  Ph.D.,  Uuiversity  of  Liverpool. 

SPANISH.  WELSH,  DANONORWEGIAN. 

Spanish  Grammar.  By  the  late  H.  Bdtleb  Clarke,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  Fellow 
of  St.  John's  CoUege,  Oxford,  late  Taylorian  Teacher  of  Spanish.     4s.  6d. 

First  Spanish  Readei  and  Writer.     By  H.  Butler  Clarke,  M.A.    2s. 

Welsh  Grammar.  By  Prof.  E.  Anwyl,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  University  CoUege, 
Aberystwyth.     os.  ;  or  (separately),  Accidence,  2s.  6d.  :  Syntax,  2s.  6d. 

Dano-Norwegian  Reader.  With  Gramraatical  Outline.  By  J.  Y. 
Bargent,  M.A.,  Oxon.,  late  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Migdalen  CoUege,  Oxford. 
3s.  6d. 


y        IS"  Single  Copies  of  any    Yolume    will  be  sent   post   free    to    any 
'  teacher  on  receipt  of  half  its  publishcd  price.     KEYS  to  the  Latin  and 

German  Readers  and  Writers  may  be  had  by  teachers  «n  direct  applioa- 

tion  to  the  publishers. 


LoNDOS:  SWAN  SONNENSCHEIN  i  CO.,  Ltd. 
Ni-.w  York:  THE  MACMILLAN  00. 


PA 
2095 
365 
1909 


Sonnenschein,   fidward   Adolf 
Ora  maritiraa     6th  ed. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


i